Harman Becker Automotive Systems 9632 Porsche PCM3.1 MOPF Headunit User Manual PCM3 1

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	1914862
Application ID	EOH9grHCf2x0/FgSUqU+IA==
Document Description	Manual
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	255kB (3187549 bits)
Date Submitted	2013-03-11 00:00:00
Date Available	2013-03-12 00:00:00
Creation Date	2009-03-18 14:40:54
Producing Software	Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 (Windows)
Document Lastmod	2012-11-22 11:58:10
Document Title	PCM3.1.book
Document Creator	PScript5.dll Version 5.2
Document Author:	DGraf

Dear Customer,
In this operating manual you will learn about the
various functions of the PCM (Porsche Communication Management) system and its operating options. To prevent danger to yourself and to others,
please start by familiarising yourself with your
PCM.
On-board literature
Keep the on-board literature in the vehicle at all
times and if you ever come to sell your vehicle,
please hand it over to the new owner.
Suggestions
Do you have any questions, suggestions or ideas
about your vehicle or the on-board literature?
Please write to us:
Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG
Vertrieb Customer Relations
Porschestraße 15-19
71634 Ludwigsburg Germany
Orientation aids in the operating manual
Equipment
This operating manual contains four orientation
aids to help you quickly locate the information you
want. They are each shown against a yellow background.
There may be some differences in equipment and
technology with respect to the illustrations and descriptions due to the ongoing development of the
systems and the varying laws in individual countries.
The master table of contents offers you an
overview of the structure of the entire manual.
In the section table of contents you will find detailed listings of the individual topics.
The index enables you to find the various topics
with the help of keywords.
The equipment versions shown are not always included as standard. Some of the functions described in this operating manual are optional
equipment and may not be available in your PCM.
If this is the case, the relevant menu items will not
be available to you.
WKD 952 220 10
03/09
Porsche, the Porsche Crest, Panamera, Carrera,
Targa, Boxster, Cayenne, Tiptronic and
Tequipment are registered trademarks
of Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG.
Printed in Germany.
Reprinting (including excerpts) as well as all other
forms of reproduction are prohibited without the
written permission of Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG.
© Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG
Porscheplatz 1
70435 Stuttgart Germany
Contents
Using the PCM..................................... 6
Important information on operation and
road safety..................................................... 6
Introduction to operation ................................. 7
Menu types and options for operation............. 12
Sound settings ............................................. 15
Sound settings with BOSE® Surround
Sound System .............................................. 16
Sound settings with Burmester® HighEnd Surround Sound System ......................... 17
Configuring the PCM display .......................... 18
TUNER............................................... 22
Radio .......................................................... 22
Making settings for radio mode...................... 25
TV ............................................................... 27
Making settings for TV mode ......................... 31
DISC ................................................. 34
iPod* .......................................................... 40
USB............................................................. 43
External Bluetooth® audio source .................. 48
Bluetooth® settings ...................................... 49
PHONE .............................................. 54
Bluetooth®..................................................54
Operating the Bluetooth® hands-free unit
(Bluetooth® mobile phone preparation)..........56
Telephone settings
(Bluetooth® mobile phone preparation) ...........66
Bluetooth® settings (Bluetooth® mobile
phone preparation)........................................67
Phonebook settings
(Bluetooth® mobile phone preparation) ...........70
Transferring the phonebook ...........................71
Operating the PCM telephone.........................72
Text messages (SMS)
(with PCM telephone only) ..............................83
Telephone settings
(PCM telephone)............................................91
Call settings
(PCM telephone)............................................93
Bluetooth® settings
(PCM telephone)............................................95
Phonebook settings ......................................98
Settings for messages and data
(PCM telephone)..........................................100
Cordless handset ........................................101
INFO ............................................... 109
Displaying traffic messages (TMC) ............... 109
Displaying sections of the route................... 111
Displaying information about the location ..... 111
Displaying detailed information about the
active audio source .................................... 111
CAR ................................................ 113
Trip data display ........................................ 113
ParkAssist ................................................. 114
Rear view camera ...................................... 116
Logbook.................................................... 119
The Sport display ....................................... 127
Extended memory ...................................... 135
NAVI ............................................... 140
General operation....................................... 140
Entering an address ................................... 141
Starting/stopping route guidance ................ 143
List of previous destinations........................ 144
Personal destination memory ...................... 146
Points of interest........................................ 151
Changing options for route guidance ........... 153
Stopovers (tour) ......................................... 155
Destination input using
geographical coordinates ........................... 158
Destination input using the map................... 158
Storing ...................................................... 158
Off-road navigation ..................................... 159
Reloading data........................................... 164
Contents
MAP ................................................166
Map display................................................ 166
Voice control ...................................172
How voice control works ............................. 172
Symbols in sample dialogues....................... 173
Commands................................................. 173
Basic voice control functions ....................... 175
Using the help function................................ 177
Operating examples .................................... 179
Index...............................................194
Technical data .................................202
Radio frequency ranges............................... 202
Tuning steps used during automatic
station search ............................................ 202
Regional codes for video DVDs .................... 202
Affiliated countries for TV tuner
country settings.......................................... 202
Contents
Using the PCM
Important information on operation and
road safety.....................................................6
Introduction to operation .................................7
Switching the PCM on/off..............................7
Setting the volume........................................8
Muting .........................................................8
Selecting the audio source ............................8
Controls and their functions...........................9
Menu types and options for operation.............12
What are the menu types? ...........................12
Calling up and operating menu types............12
Exiting menus.............................................13
Operating lists............................................13
Operating input menus ................................14
Sound settings..............................................15
Setting the bass .........................................15
Setting the treble........................................15
Setting the balance.....................................15
Setting the fader ........................................15
Setting the loudness ...................................16
Setting SDV (speed-dependent volume) ........16
Sound settings with BOSE® Surround
Sound System ..............................................16
Setting surround.........................................16
Setting linear..............................................16
Setting AudioPilot® .....................................16
Sound settings with Burmester®
High-End Surround Sound System ..................17
Setting the listening position........................17
Setting smooth...........................................17
Setting surround.........................................17
Setting live ................................................ 17
Setting sound conditioner........................... 17
Configuring the PCM display.......................... 18
Configuring display settings........................ 18
Setting the language .................................. 19
Setting the units ........................................ 19
Resetting personal settings ........................ 20
Using the PCM
Important information on
operation and road safety
Using the PCM
The PCM (Porsche Communication Management) system is the central control unit for the radio, TV tuner, disc mode (CD/DVD, USB, iPod and
an external audio source), sound settings, onboard computer, navigation system and telephone.
To avoid danger or injury to yourself and others
while using your PCM, you must take the following
into consideration:
WARNING!
Accident hazard. Distraction could result in
you losing control of the vehicle.
û Operate your PCM only when you are safely
in control of your vehicle and traffic conditions permit. If in doubt, stop the vehicle
and operate the PCM while the vehicle is
parked.
CAUTION!
Injury hazard. Opening the housing or a damaged housing represents a hazard due to invisible laser radiation.
û The PCM is a Class 1 laser product. Do not
open the housing.
The PCM does not contain any user-serviceable parts. Any maintenance work must be
performed exclusively by qualified service
experts.
WARNING!
Accident hazard. The navigation system is
only intended as an aid to the driver and makes
recommendations on the routes to take. This
does not release you from full responsibility for
observing road safety, traffic conditions, legal
road traffic regulations and any other relevant
regulations while driving your vehicle.
As the driver, you must assess the traffic situation. You have sole responsibility for road
safety while driving your car.
û Continue to pay attention to the traffic situation.
Using the PCM
WARNING!
Injury hazard. The telephone must not be
used near explosives or flammable materials
(e.g. at a petrol station) or near operations involving explosives.
Mobile phones must be switched off in certain
hazardous areas such as near petrol stations,
fuel depots, chemical plants and demolition
work in progress using explosives, for example. They can interfere with technical equipment.
û Please heed appropriate warnings.
û Observe statutory regulations and local restrictions when using the telephone.
Introduction to operation
Switching the PCM on/off
Switching on/off via the ignition
(permanently)
û Switch on the ignition.
The PCM is permanently active.
Switching on/off via the left rotary knob
If the PCM is not to be permanently active, you can
also switch it on/off using the left rotary knob.
û Press and hold the left rotary knob (volume
control) for at least one second.
Battery discharge protection
NOTICE
Risk of damage. The PCM contains high-quality electronic components which require special care with regard to maintenance.
The following should be observed:
– The display is sensitive to scratches.
– The device must not be sprayed with liquids. Ingress of liquids can result in the destruction of the equipment.
û Carefully clean your PCM periodically using
a dry, clean and soft cloth (microfibre cloth)
or a cleaning brush.
û Do not exert excessive pressure on the surface when cleaning.
>>>
û Under no circumstances may solvents
such as methylated spirits, thinners, petrol,
acetone or alcohol (ethanol, methanol or
isopropyl alcohol) or scouring agents of
any type be used.
û Remove fingerprints using a slightly damp
cloth or a mild cleaning agent.
û Never spray cleaning agents or other liquids directly onto the display. Instead
dampen a cloth and carefully wipe the display clean.
û If faults occur, do not open the PCM equipment yourself under any circumstances.
Always have defective devices repaired by
a qualified specialist workshop. We recommend that this work be performed by a Porsche partner, as Porsche partners have
trained workshop personnel as well as the
necessary parts and tools.
Switching on/off via the left rotary knob is also
possible when the ignition is off.
To protect your vehicle’s battery, the PCM will automatically switch itself off again after a few minutes.
Using the PCM
Setting the volume
Cancelling muting
û Turn the left rotary knob t.
û To cancel muting, briefly press the left rotary
knob u again.
Depending on the situation, this adjusts the volume for:
– the active audio source,
– a traffic announcement,
– a voice control system announcement,
– the ringtone during an incoming call,
– hands-free mode during a telephone call.
Muting navigation or traffic announcements
û To interrupt a navigation or traffic announcement, briefly press the left rotary knob u
during the announcement.
Muting
Selecting the audio source
Muting an audio source
Pressing the a button opens a window
where you can set the current audio source.
û Briefly press the left rotary knob u.
This mutes the active audio source. The mute
symbol
is shown in the bottom line.
However, navigation recommendations, telephone calls and traffic announcements continue to be audible.
Using the PCM
The window closes again as soon as:
– you have set an audio source or
– several seconds pass and you have made no
entry.
1. Press the a button.
2. Select the audio source you want on the display.
I
Right rotary knob s
q: Highlights a menu item
r: Selects the highlighted menu item
i button
K Back button h
L Eject/retract button for CDs and DVDs
M g main menu button
N f main menu button
O End call button k
P c main menu button
Q Lift handset button l
R n main menu button
S m main menu button
Controls and their functions
The controls for the PCM are arranged below the
display and around the CD/DVD slot.
A a button
p arrow button
C Left rotary knob v
t: Sets the volume
u (press briefly): Switches on or mutes the
device
u (press and hold): Switches the device on
and off
o arrow button
E b main menu button
F Slot for SIM card
G d main menu button
H w main menu button
Using the PCM
A - a button
Pressing the a button opens a window
where you can set the current audio source.
The window closes again when:
– you have set an audio source,
– several seconds pass and you have made no
entry.
B - p arrow button
By briefly pressing the arrow button you can:
Turning the left rotary knob t changes the following settings:
– volume of the active audio source,
– volume of a traffic announcement,
– volume of a voice control system announcement,
– volume when in hands-free mode during a telephone call,
– ringtone volume of the telephone during an incoming call,
– cancelling muting (turning the rotary knob
clockwise).
– start a search downwards in radio or TV mode,
– skip a track in CD/DVD, USB or iPod mode.
Pressing the arrow button for several seconds in
CD/DVD mode starts fast reverse.
C - Left rotary knob v
Pressing and holding the left rotary knob u
switches the device on or off.
10
Using the PCM
D - o arrow button
By briefly pressing the arrow button you can:
– start a search upwards in radio or TV mode,
– skip a track in CD/DVD, USB or iPod mode.
Pressing the arrow button for several seconds in
CD/DVD mode starts fast forward.
E - b main menu button
Pressing the b button opens a menu
where you can make the sound settings for the
PCM.
Briefly pressing the left rotary knob u executes
the following functions:
F - Slot for the telephone SIM card
–
–
–
–
To use the internal telephone, you must insert the
SIM card in the slot provided.
cancels navigation and traffic announcements,
rejects an incoming telephone call,
mutes the device,
switches on the system.
Alternatively, the SIM card of a mobile phone with
the Bluetooth® SIM Access Profile can be used.
G - d main menu button
K- Back button h
Pressing the d button displays various general information such as the current audio source,
the date and time and the signal strength for your
telephone network.
By pressing the Back button h you can execute various functions.
H - w main menu button
Pressing the w button opens an overview of
various trip data.
I - Right rotary knob s
Along with the touchscreen, the right rotary knob
is the central control:
– Turn the rotary knob q to highlight the
menu item you want.
– Press r to select a highlighted menu item.
J - i button
Since not all of the operating options for a main
menu can be shown on one display, the i
menu summarises various operating options for
the main menus. You call up these operating options by pressing the i button.
 Instead of pressing the button you can also
touch the tab of the same name on the display.
– If you press the button for several seconds and
the magazine compartments are at least partially full, all CDs or DVDs are ejected one after
the other.
Briefly press the button to:
– undo a selection in the menu,
– cancel a list selection.
Press and hold the button to:
M - g main menu button
Pressing the g button opens the map view of
the navigation function.
– delete all characters already entered into an input menu.
N - f main menu button
L - Eject button j
Pressing the f button opens the menu of the
navigation function.
Pressing the j button executes the following functions depending on the equipment of your
PCM:
PCM without CD/DVD changer
– A CD or DVD inserted in the drive is ejected so
it can be removed.
O - End call button k
By pressing the End call button k you can:
– reject an incoming telephone call or
– end an active call.
PCM with CD/DVD changer
P - c main menu button
– The CD/DVD changer menu is opened. Pressing the button again ejects the highlighted CD
or DVD so it can be removed.
– If you press the button for several seconds and
there are still no CDs/DVDs in the changer
compartments, you will be prompted to fill the
individual compartments one after the other.
Pressing the c button opens the menu of
the telephone function.
Using the PCM
11
Q - Lift handset button l
By pressing the Lift handset button l you can:
– accept an incoming telephone call or
– call up the quick dial function.
R - n main menu button
Pressing the n button opens the menu for operating the CD, DVD, iPod, USB, AUX and AUX BT
audio sources.
S - m main menu button
Pressing the m button opens the menu for
radio mode.
12
Using the PCM
Menu types and options for
operation
The PCM display is a colour touchscreen. All menu
functions, list entries and text input fields as well
as the arrow symbols and scrollbars can be operated by lightly touching the corresponding location on the display.
Option menus
Each of the eight main menus has an option menu
where you find settings and other functions for the
respective main menu.
Calling up and operating menu types
Calling up main menus
What are the menu types?
Main menus
The range of functions of the PCM is divided between the following main menus:
– m: radio main menu,
– n: disc main menu,
– c: telephone main menu,
– f: navigation main menu,
– g: map view,
– b: sound settings,
– d: information menu as well as
– w: vehicle and trip data main menu.
Each of these main menus contains various submenus for a specific topic.
û To call up a main menu, press the appropriate
button below the display.
You can switch from one main menu to another at
any time.
When you return to a main menu, you return to the
function you were using before exiting the menu.
If you want to return to the top level of a main
menu, you must press the relevant main menu button twice in succession.
Calling up option menus
û To call up an option menu, press the i
button.
- or û Touch the tab on the display with your finger.
Operating menus with the touchscreen
Exiting menus
û Touch the individual menu items or symbols directly on the display.
û Touch the scrollbar between the two symbols
and
Returning to the next highest menu
- or -
û Press the Back button h to cancel an operation and return to the next highest menu.
Highlighted list entries are framed in orange.
Returning to the main menu
Showing the first letter of list entries
 If the menu functions cannot be operated by
touching the display, it is because the touchscreen is deactivated. For further information,
see “Switching the touchscreen on/off” on
page 19.
Operating menus with the right rotary knob
Instead of operation on the touchscreen, you can
also operate the menu items with the right rotary
knob.
û Turn the right rotary knob t to highlight a
menu item.
û Press u the right rotary knob to activate the
highlighted menu item.
 The process of highlighting q and activating r using the right rotary knob or touching the menu item on the display is referred to
below as “selecting”.
û Press a main menu button to return to the corresponding main menu.
Returning to the top level of a main menu
û Briefly press the appropriate main menu button
twice in succession to return to the top level of
the main menu.
Operating lists
The following operating options are available to
you for selecting a list entry:
û Touch the symbols
- or -
and
on the display.
û Turn the right rotary knob q.
To make it easier to find your way in long lists, you
can show the first letter of list entries in the following lists:
– the phonebook,
– the list for the music search in the iPod or in
USB mode,
– the track list in USB and MP3 disc mode or
– the destination memory in the navigation
menu.
û Touch and hold one of the two symbols
for several seconds.
and
- or -
û Quickly turn the right rotary knob q.
 Only letters with corresponding entries in the
list will be displayed.
Using the PCM
13
In addition to the letter fields, the input menus also
provide a number of function fields for changing
the character set displayed and for moving the
cursor:
deletes the last character entered
(if button is touched briefly)
- or deletes all characters entered
(if button is touched and held)
Operating input menus
In many cases you can enter data into the PCM.
This can be the case when entering an SMS message, a telephone number or a navigation destination, for example. The various input menus are
customised to their respective operating situations.
switches to positioning mode when
composing text messages (SMS)
switches to uppercase
switches to lowercase
switches to numbers and punctuation marks
switches to special characters
û To enter data into an input menu, lightly touch
the characters on the display.
switches to insertion mode when
composing a text message
- or -
inserts a period
û Highlight the characters by turning the right rotary knob q and insert them by pressing
the right rotary knob r.
û To confirm and accept the data you have entered, select OK.
14
Using the PCM
inserts a comma
inserts a colon
inserts a space
deletes all entries in the input field
calls up a stored list, for example
when entering an address in the navigation system
confirms the input and closes the
input menu
Greyed out characters cannot be selected.
 In many cases the input menus are pre-sorted. This means that after you have entered at
least three letters, only the letters for which
there is an entry in a list are offered for selection.
Setting the layout for the keyboard of the
input menu
Sound settings
Setting the balance
The letter fields in the input menu can either be arranged alphabetically or like a computer keyboard.
You can set the sound of your PCM for each audio
source separately using the sound settings in the
Sound menu. As soon as an audio source is selected, its sound settings are set automatically.
The Balance setting allows you to set the volume
distribution between the left and right speakers.
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PCM system”
> “Display PCM”
> “Keyboard layout”.
4. Select one of the two options:
– “ABC”:
The letter fields are arranged alphabetically.
– “QWERTY/QWERZ”:
The letter fields are arranged like a computer keyboard.
The chosen keyboard layout is set.
The range of displays and functions for the sound
settings depends on the vehicle type and the
equipment installed. In some cases, therefore, not
all of the functions described here may be available.
Setting the bass
1. Press the b button.
2. Select “Bass”.
3. Make the setting you want by touching the two
symbols
and
1. Press the b button.
2. Select “Balance”.
3. Make the setting you want by touching the
symbols
and
or by turning
q the right rotary knob.
Setting the fader
The Fader setting allows you to set the volume distribution between the front and rear speakers.
1. Press the b button.
2. Select “Fader”.
3. Make the setting you want by touching the
symbols
and
or by turning
q the right rotary knob.
Setting the treble
1. Press the b button.
2. Select “Treble”.
3. Make the setting you want by touching the two
symbols
and
Using the PCM
15
Setting the loudness
“Loudness” increases the sound volume by increasing the bass and treble frequencies.
This setting is particularly effective for low volumes and guarantees a pleasant sound.
1. Press the b button.
2. Select “Loudness” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
Setting SDV (speed-dependent volume)
The “SDV” function automatically adjusts the audio
playback volume as a function of the vehicle’s
speed.
You can set the degree to which the volume adjusts to the vehicle’s speed on a scale from 0 (no
increase in volume) to 5 (large increase in volume).
1. Press the b button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SDV”.
4. Make the setting you want by touching the
symbols
and
16
Using the PCM
Sound settings with
BOSE® Surround Sound System
Setting surround
Activating “Surround” achieves a sound setting
with greater spatial depth.
This permits the creation of a virtual surround
sound with conventional stereo sources such as
CDs, radio or MP3 formats, for example.
The function can be set separately for the individual audio sources.
The “Surround” function is generally activated with
multi-channel sources such as 5.1 DVDs, for example.
It cannot be activated for the sources “AM” and
“TV”.
1. Press the b button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Surround” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
Setting linear
Selecting “Linear” switches the PCM from a bassheavy setting (linear off) to a more neutral sound
(linear on).
1. Press the b button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Linear” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
Setting AudioPilot®
If the “AudioPilot” function is activated, the noise
level inside the vehicle is monitored. Background
noise is analysed and the volume and dynamics of
the music playback across the entire frequency
spectrum is automatically adjusted.
An additional sound control feature is available for
vehicles with convertible tops. It adjusts the music
playback to the special requirements when driving
with an open top.
1. Press the b button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “AudioPilot” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
Sound settings with Burmester®
High-End Surround Sound System
Setting the listening position
The “Listening position” setting allows you to optimise the sound settings for the front or rear seats.
If, on the other hand, you select the symmetrical
setting, you achieve the best possible sound setting taking all seats into account.
1. Press the b button.
2. Select “Listening position”.
3. Select one of the following settings:
– “Front”,
– “Symmetrical” or
– “Rear”.
Setting smooth
The “Smooth” function is used to precisely reduce
overemphasized frequencies in the midrange and
treble, which may be present in highly compressed music material. Typical examples include
playing MP3 files with a low data rate or listening
to an FM station with unfavourable reception conditions.
This function facilitates a relaxing, pleasant listening experience for these sources over a long period.
1. Press the b button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET Burmester”.
4. Select “Smooth” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
Setting surround
Activating “Surround” achieves a sound setting
with greater spatial depth.
This permits the creation of a virtual surround
sound with conventional stereo sources such as
CDs, radio or MP3 formats, for example.
The function can be set separately for the individual audio sources. The listening position is then
set to “Symmetrical”.
The “Surround” function is generally activated with
multi-channel sources such as 5.1 DVDs, for example.
It cannot be activated for the sources “AM” and
“TV”.
1. Press the b button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET Burmester”.
4. Select “Surround” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
Setting live
The “Live” function generates surround sound that
sounds just like a live concert from any stereo music signal. This is achieved through the precise addition of the type of reverberation and tonal components normally found in concert halls.
The listening position is set to “Symmetrical” for
this.
1. Press the b button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET Burmester”.
4. Select “Live” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( )
the function.
Setting sound conditioner
If the “Sound conditioner” function is activated, the
noise level inside the vehicle is monitored. Background noise is analysed and the volume and dynamics of the music playback across the entire
frequency spectrum is automatically adjusted.
An additional sound control feature is available for
vehicles with convertible tops. It adjusts the music
playback to the special requirements when driving
with an open top.
Using the PCM
17
1. Press the b button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET Burmester”.
4. Select “Sound conditioner” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
Configuring the PCM display
You can set various units, the date and time, the
welcome display and the user language of the
PCM in the “SET PCM system” menu.
Configuring display settings
Switching the display off
You can switch off or darken the display using the
“Switch off display” menu.
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PCM system”
> “Display PCM”
> “Screen”.
4. Select “Switch off display”.
5. Confirm the prompt that appears.
Switching the display back on
You can switch a display that is off back on at any
time (if the touchscreen is active) by touching it.
û Touch anywhere on the screen with your finger.
18
Using the PCM
- or -
û Press any button.
Choosing colours for the map view (day/
night design)
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PCM system”
> “Display PCM”.
4. Select “Day/night switchover”.
The following options are then available for you
to select:
– “Automatic”
Your PCM automatically switches from day
design to night design as a function of the
vehicle lighting.
– “Day”
Your PCM always remains set to the day design colours. This means the display colours
are optimised for legibility.
– “Night”
Your PCM always remains set to the night design colours. The display colours are
dimmed to prevent glare.
5. Set the option you want by selecting it.
Choosing the brightness of the display
Displaying the system version
Selecting the language yourself
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PCM system”
> “Display PCM”
> “Screen”
> “Brightness”.
4. You can set the brightness by selecting the two
symbols
and
You have the option of viewing the system version
of your PCM.
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PCM system”
> “PCM language”.
4. Select the language you want.
Switching the touchscreen on/off
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PCM system”
> “Display PCM”.
> “Screen”.
4. Select “Touchscreen off” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PCM system”
> “Display PCM”
> “System version”.
The system version is displayed.
Setting the language
Adapting the language to the instrument
cluster
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PCM system”
> “PCM language”.
4. Select “Automatic”.
The language of the instrument cluster is set.
Setting the units
Adapting the units to the instrument cluster
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PCM system”
> “PCM units”.
4. Select “Automatic”.
The settings of the instrument cluster are set.
 If the language of the instrument cluster is not
available as a language in the PCM, the language “English GB” is set.
Using the PCM
19
Setting the unit for consumption
Resetting personal settings
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PCM system”
> “PCM units”
> “Consump.”.
4. Select one of the following units:
– “l/100km”,
– “km/l”,
– “mpg” or
– “mpg (UK)”.
This menu item allows you to reset settings you
have previously made.
Setting the display unit for temperatures
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PCM system”
> “PCM units”
> “Temperature”.
4. Select either “°C (Celsius)” or “°F (Fahrenheit)”.
20
Using the PCM
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PCM system”
> “Reset PCM”.
4. Select one of the following options:
– “Factory settings”
Resets all settings to predefined values. Any
data you entered (addresses, destinations
and telephone numbers) is, however, retained.
– “Vehicle handover”
Resets all settings to predefined values and
deletes the data you entered (addresses,
destinations, telephone numbers, logbook
as well as the recordings in the Sport display).
5. Confirm the relevant prompt by selecting
“Yes”.
TUNER
Radio ......................................................... 22
Calling up the main menu for radio mode..... 22
Tuning to stations ...................................... 22
Storing stations on station buttons in the
preset memories ....................................... 23
Traffic programme (TP) .............................. 24
Making settings for radio mode ..................... 25
Switching RDS on/off ................................. 25
Switching regionalisation on/off .................. 25
Switching RDS radio text on/off .................. 25
Choosing a PTY (programme type) filter ..... 26
Setting sorting criteria for the FM station list 26
TV............................................................... 27
Calling up the main menu for TV mode ........ 27
Tuning to TV stations ................................. 27
Storing TV stations .................................... 28
Showing the information window ................. 29
Video text ................................................ 29
Electronic Programme Guide ...................... 30
Making settings for TV mode......................... 31
Setting sorting of the station list ................. 31
Setting the reception country ..................... 31
Setting TV picture parameters ................... 31
TUNER
21
Tuning to stations
Tuning to stations using the station list
You have the following options for tuning to a station:
The station list contains all the stations that can
currently be received. It is only available in FM
mode.
–
–
–
–
TUNER
Radio
Calling up the main menu for radio mode
û Press the m button repeatedly until
the mode you want (AM - FM - TV) is highlighted in the bottom line.
You will see the main menu for the chosen mode
together with the station buttons. If there are already stations stored on the station buttons, the
names or frequencies of these stations are displayed.
If the station tuned to is broadcasting RDS signals
(RDS = Radio Data System) in FM mode, you will
see the information contained in these signals
(e.g. station name, programme type and radio
text) above the station buttons.
To find out more, please refer also to the sections
“Switching RDS on/off” on page 25 and “Switching RDS radio text on/off” on page 25.
22
TUNER
using the station buttons,
using the station list,
via a station search or
entering the frequency directly.
Tuning to stations using the station buttons
To be able to tune to a station using the station
buttons, there must already be a station stored on
a station button. To find out more, please refer to
the section “Storing stations on station buttons in
the preset memories” on page 23.
1. Press the m button repeatedly until
the mode you want is highlighted.
2. Briefly press the station button.
The station stored on the station button is
tuned to.
1. Press the m button repeatedly until
“FM” is displayed.
2. Select “Station list”.
The station list is opened. In addition to the station names, it also contains the respective programme types.
The station currently tuned to is highlighted in
colour.
3. Select a station.
Tuning to stations via a station search
û Start a search by pressing the arrow buttons p
and o.
The search stops at the next station in the
waveband.
Tuning to stations by entering the frequency
directly
1. Press the m button repeatedly until
“FM” is displayed.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Manual tune”.
The input menu is opened. The frequency of
the current station is displayed.
4. Tune to the frequency using one of the following options:
– Entering it directly by touching the number
buttons.
- or -
– Tuning to the next station from the station list
by touching the symbols
and
on the
display.
- or – Tuning to the next station from the station list
by touching the stations shown on the left
and right on the display.
- or – Turning the rotary knob q to change the
frequency upwards or downwards.
As soon as a valid frequency is input, it is tuned
to.
Tuning to stations by scanning
If you activate this function, each station found
within the frequency range will be played for approx. 5 seconds.
1. Press the m button repeatedly until
the mode you want is highlighted.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Start scan”.
Each station within the frequency range is
played for approx. 5 seconds.
4. Select “Stop scan” to tune to the scanned station.
Storing stations on station buttons in the
preset memories
Setting the preset memory
There are six memory locations available in each
of the preset memories. The preset memories for
radio mode are:
– In FM mode:
FM 1, FM 2, FM 3, BEST FM and MIXED.
– In AM mode:
AM 1, AM 2, AM 3 and MIXED.
 The PCM automatically fills the station buttons
for the Best FM preset memory at regular intervals with the stations with the strongest reception.
 In contrast to all other preset memories, the
MIXED preset memory can store stations
from different modes. This means you can
store stations from FM mode and AM mode as
well as stations from TV mode here.
TUNER
23
1. Press the m button repeatedly until
the mode you want (FM - AM - TV) is highlighted.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Preset memory”.
The available preset memories are listed.
4. Select the preset memory you want.
5. Touch the m tab in the header again.
 If you briefly touch the preset memory displayed in the main menu, you will likewise
switch to another preset memory.
Choosing a station in the station list and
storing it
1. Press the m button repeatedly until
“FM” is displayed.
2. Select “Station list”.
3. Select the station entry you want by pressing
and holding it for several seconds.
The station buttons are displayed and the station previously chosen is shown in the information window.
4. To store the station on a station button, select
the station button you want.
The station list is displayed again.
24
TUNER
Storing via an automatic station search
(autostore)
The automatic station search is only available for
the preset memories FM 1, FM 2, FM 3 as well as
AM 1, AM 2 and AM 3.
1. Press the m button repeatedly until
the mode you want (FM - AM - TV) is highlighted.
2. Set the preset memory if applicable
(> page 23).
3. Press and hold the “Autostore” menu item.
The search is activated. It stores the six stations with the strongest reception and tunes to
the strongest station.
Storing stations manually
1. Press the m button repeatedly until
the mode you want (FM - AM - TV) is highlighted.
2. Tune to the station (> page 22).
3. Set the preset memory if applicable
(> page 23).
4. Press and hold the station button for a few seconds.
As soon as the station is stored on the station
button, the station name or the station frequency is displayed on the button and you hear a
signal tone.
Traffic programme (TP)
Various FM radio stations broadcast traffic messages in addition to their radio programmes.
The broadcasting stations are responsible for the
quality of these traffic messages. For that reason,
no liability can be accepted for the completeness
and correctness of the information.
Traffic messages are part of the RDS signals and
are not available everywhere. To find out more,
please refer also to the sections “Switching RDS
on/off” on page 25 and “Displaying traffic messages (TMC)” on page 109.
Switching the traffic programme on
1. Press the m button repeatedly until
“FM” is highlighted.
2. Select “Traffic prog.” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
When the traffic programme is switched on,
the abbreviation TP (Traffic Programme) is displayed in the bottom line and you hear the traffic messages regardless of the audio source
that is currently active.
Setting the Traffic prog. volume
The traffic programme volume refers to the volume at which the traffic programme announcements are output.
It specifies the minimum volume as a function of
the volume of the audio source currently selected.
1. Press the b button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Traffic prog.”.
4. Make the setting you want on the scale by
touching the two symbols
and
Making settings for radio mode
Switching RDS on/off
The PCM is capable of receiving RDS signals (RDS
= Radio Data System) in FM mode. It supports the
following functions:
–
–
–
–
–
station name,
programme type (PTY),
traffic programme,
radio text as well as
detection of alternative frequencies.
(Radio stations transmit programmes with the
same programme content on different frequencies in different regions.)
Switching regionalisation on/off
When RDS (tracking of the alternative frequencies)
is active, regionalisation can additionally be
switched on or off.
If stations have a station chain with varying regional programme contents, switching on regionalisation prevents switching between the different stations.
1. Press the m button repeatedly until
“FM” is highlighted.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET FM”.
4. Select “Regional” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
You can switch tracking of these alternative frequencies on or off in the Set menu.
Switching RDS radio text on/off
1. Press the m button repeatedly until
“FM” is highlighted.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET FM”.
4. Select “RDS” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( )
the function.
1. Press the m button repeatedly until
“FM” is highlighted.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET FM”.
4. Select “Radio text” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
TUNER
25
Choosing a PTY (programme type) filter
RDS stations can broadcast the station’s programme type (PTY).
The programme type allows stations to be classified based on their genre, for example “pop”,
“rock” or “news”.
If a programme type is selected, only stations that
correspond to the selected programme type are
displayed in the FM station list.
You can select as many different programme
types in a list as you wish.
1. Press the m button repeatedly until
“FM” is highlighted.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET FM”
> “PTY filter”.
4. Select the programme types you want for sorting ( ) or deselect those you wish to omit ( ).
By selecting “Activate all” you can select ( )
or deselect ( ) all the programme types in the
list.
26
TUNER
Setting sorting criteria for the FM station
list
The FM station list can be sorted according to various criteria. You can set the sorting as follows:
1. Press the m button repeatedly until
“FM” is highlighted.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET FM”.
4. Select “Sorting criteria”.
Various radio buttons are then available for you
to select:
– Alphabetical: The station list is sorted alphabetically.
– Genre (PTY): The station list is sorted according to programme type (PTY).
If a programme type is selected, only stations that correspond to the selected programme type are displayed in the FM station
list. Only after selecting “Activate all” in the
PTY filter list are all stations that can be received listed.
– Station strength: The station list is displayed
sorted according to station strength. Stations with good reception are shown at the
top of the list.
– Last stations: The station list shows the stations listened to for at least two minutes. The
last station listened to is shown at the top of
the list.
– Frequency: The station list is displayed sorted according to the order of the stations in
the frequency band.
5. Set the sorting option you want by selecting it.
TV
Tuning to TV stations
The standard TV on the PCM can receive non-encrypted terrestrial analogue and digital (DVB-T)
programmes. Depending on the country and reception area, only analogue, digital or a mixture of
analogue and digital programmes may be available. If a programme is simultaneously received in
both analogue and digital forms, the TV tuner automatically selects the higher-quality of the two.
Displaying the TV picture
In some areas, DVB-T programmes are also broadcast without picture content. These are characterised by an additional note symbol.
 The activation of the automatic hatchback as
well as some other vehicle functions may sporadic cause temporary restrictions of the TV
reception.
WARNING!
Accident hazard. For your own safety, no TV
picture or video text can be shown during driving for legal reasons.
1. Press the m button repeatedly until
the “TV” mode is highlighted in the bottom line.
2. Touch the information area in the TV menu
(above the station buttons on the display).
The TV picture of the TV station currently tuned
to is shown.
Calling up the main menu for TV mode
û Press the m button repeatedly until
the “TV” mode is highlighted in the bottom line.
To use TV mode, you must first tune to a TV station. You can do this via a station search or using
the TV menu.
 You can return from the TV picture of the current station to the main menu for TV mode at
any time by touching the display or pressing
the Back button h.
Tuning to stations using the station buttons
Station buttons must already have TV stations
stored before they can be used to tune to a station. To find out more, please refer to the section
“Storing TV stations” on page 28.
1. Press the m button repeatedly until
the “TV” mode is highlighted in the bottom line.
2. Briefly press the station button.
The station is tuned to and its TV picture displayed. An information window appears for
about 3 seconds.
û To receive a TV picture, the vehicle must be
stopped.
û In some countries, the parking brake must
also be engaged.
TUNER
27
 The digital programmes can also be selected
using the EPG list.
To find out more, please refer to the section
“Electronic Programme Guide” on page 30.
Storing TV stations
Each of the preset memories, TV 1, TV 2, TV 3 and
MIXED, has six memory locations available.
Tuning to stations using the station list
The station list provides details of the stations that
can currently be received.
Depending on the setting, the station list is arranged alphabetically, based on reception quality
or based on the last stations. To find out more,
please refer to the section “Making settings for TV
mode” on page 31.
1. Press the m button repeatedly until
the “TV” mode is highlighted in the bottom line.
2. Select “Station list”.
3. Select the TV station or the DVB-T radio station
you want.
The station is tuned to and its TV picture displayed.
28
TUNER
In contrast to all other preset memories, the
MIXED preset memory can store stations from different modes. Here, you can manually store stations from FM/AM mode as well as stations from
TV mode.
Storing stations manually
1. Press the m button repeatedly until
the “TV” mode is highlighted in the bottom line.
2. Tune to a TV station (> page 27).
3. Press and hold the station button for a few seconds.
As soon as the TV station is stored on the station button, the station name is shown on the
button.
Storing via an automatic station search
The automatic station search is only available for
the preset memories TV 1, TV 2 and TV 3.
1. Set “TV” mode.
2. If necessary, set the preset memory as follows:
a.Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
b.Select “Preset memory”.
The available preset memories are listed.
c.Select the preset memory you want.
d.Touch the m tab in the header again.
 You can likewise change the preset memory
by touching “TV 1”, etc. in the TV main menu.
3. The set preset memory now appears after the
“Autostore” menu item.
Select the menu item.
The search starts. It stores the six programmes with the strongest reception and
switches to the strongest programme.
Selecting a video text page
1. Touching the display opens a bar for entering
the numbers directly.
2. Touch the appropriate digits on the display.
After the third digit is entered, the video text
search begins and the video text page is
shown. The bar for entering numbers is hidden.
Showing the information window
û Press the right rotary knob r while in TV
mode.
The information window is called up together
with the “Station list” menu item.
While for digital programmes it shows details
about the programme currently active, for analogue programmes the information window only
contains the name of the station plus the current
time.
 The various information can, however, only be
displayed if the relevant signal is being broadcast by the station.
Video text
Calling up video text
1. Press the m button repeatedly until
the “TV” mode is highlighted in the bottom line.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Video text”.
The video text display appears. When called up
for the first time, the programme page “100”
is shown.
 Not all stations transmit a video text signal.
 If the “Video text via TV” function is activated,
the video text picture is overlaid onto that of
the TV programme. To find out more, please
refer to the section “Placing video text over
the TV picture” on page 30.
Zooming into a video text page
û Call up an enlarged view of the upper half of the
display by turning the right rotary knob q.
Turn the knob again to switch to an enlarged
view of the lower half of the display.
û Turn once more to return to the normal page
view.
TUNER
29
Please note that only digital channels transmit
EPG data. This service is not available for analogue channels.
Placing video text over the TV picture
If you activate this function, the video text page is
overlaid transparently over the picture of the current TV programme.
1. Press the m button repeatedly until
the “TV” mode is highlighted in the bottom line.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET TV”.
4. Select “Video text via TV” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
Electronic Programme Guide
The PCM features an Electronic Programme
Guide, which contains various information about
the digital programmes. The programmes are listed in chronological order.
Information (station, progress bar, end time and
name of current programme) about programmes
that are currently playing is shown at the top of the
list. This is followed by information (station, start/
end time, names of following episodes) for the
subsequent programmes.
30
TUNER
1. Press the m button repeatedly until
the “TV” mode is highlighted in the bottom line.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “EPG list”.
The Electronic Programme Guide appears.
Selecting an entry in the EPG list tunes to the
corresponding programme and shows its TV
picture.
 The menu item is greyed out if no EPG data is
being received.
You can also view the EPG data available for
the current programme in the d menu by
selecting the “Details TV” menu item. To find
out more, please refer to the section “Displaying detailed information about the active audio
source” on page 111.
1. Press the m button repeatedly until
the “TV” mode is highlighted in the bottom line.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET TV”
> “Sorting criteria”.
4. Select the sorting you want.
Setting the reception country
Making settings for TV mode
Setting sorting of the station list
The TV station list can be sorted according to various criteria. You can set the sorting as follows:
– Alphabetical: When sorted alphabetically,
DVB-T TV stations are shown first, followed by
analogue TV stations. DVB-T radio stations are
at the bottom of the list.
– Station strength: When sorted based on station strength, the stations are listed in descending order of reception quality.
– Last stations: The station list shows the stations tuned to for at least two minutes. Stations that cannot be received are not displayed.
Information about the available channel range is
stored for the PCM in the country setting.
If you take your vehicle abroad and wish to use the
TV tuner, you should first set the correct entry in
the country list.
1. Press the m button repeatedly until
the “TV” mode is highlighted in the bottom line.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET TV”
> “Reception country”.
The country list is opened. It is sorted alphabetically. If the correct region is not available
in the list, you can choose a setting with a
symbol representing the correct TV standard.
Setting TV picture parameters
Setting the Brightness
1. Press the m button repeatedly until
the “TV” mode is highlighted in the bottom line.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET TV”
> “Picture param. - TV”
> “Brightness”.
4. Make the setting you want by touching the two
symbols
and
 A complete list of the reception countries can
be found in the section “Affiliated countries for
TV tuner country settings” on page 203.
TUNER
31
Setting the Contrast
Setting the Format
1. Press the m button repeatedly until
the “TV” mode is highlighted in the bottom line.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET TV”
> “Picture param. - TV”
> “Contrast”.
4. Make the setting you want by touching the two
symbols
and
1. Press the m button repeatedly until
the “TV” mode is highlighted in the bottom line.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET TV”
> “Picture param. - TV”
> “Format”.
The following options are then available for you
to select:
– “Automatic”
The picture format being received by the TV
tuner is evaluated and its on-screen display
is adjusted accordingly (automatic format
switching between 4:3 and 16:9).
– “4:3”
The picture is shown in such a way that no
image contents are lost.
– “16:9”
The picture is expanded to cover the entire
width of the display. The picture is cropped
at the upper and lower edges of the display.
This setting is particularly useful for programmes that are broadcast with a black
border at the upper and lower edges of the
display.
4. Select the setting you want.
Setting the Colour
1. Press the m button repeatedly until
the “TV” mode is highlighted in the bottom line.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET TV”
> “Picture param. - TV”
> “Colour”.
4. Make the setting you want by touching the two
symbols
and
32
TUNER
 With the Automatic setting, an ID broadcast
by the station in question is analysed.
Some stations do not broadcast this ID correctly, with the result that the PCM cannot implement format settings automatically.
Under certain circumstances, poor reception
can lead to the ID not being analysed properly.
In such cases, please set a fixed format (4:3
or 16:9).
Setting the tint (special feature of NTSC
stations)
The Tint display option is additionally available
when receiving signals from NTSC stations
(National Television System Committee: colour TV
standard in the USA and Japan, amongst other
countries). This allows colour distortions related
to transmission to be corrected.
1. Press the m button repeatedly until
the “TV” mode is highlighted in the bottom line.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET TV”
> “Picture param. - TV”
> “Tint”.
4. Make the setting you want by touching the two
symbols
and
DISC
Loading and ejecting CDs/DVDs ..................36
Calling up the main menu for
CD/DVD mode ...........................................37
Selecting a CD/DVD....................................37
Selecting a track ........................................37
Selecting a track (MP3 CD/DVD)..................37
Selecting a chapter in video DVD mode ........38
Setting the audio format for video DVD ........38
Setting audio groups (DVD-Audio) ................38
Naming a CD..............................................38
Skipping to the previous/next track..............39
Fast forward/reverse ..................................39
Repeating a track .......................................39
Switching the shuffle function on/off ............39
Starting/stopping scanning .........................39
Searching for music in MP3 mode
(full text search)..........................................39
iPod* ..........................................................40
Calling up the main menu for iPod mode.......40
Searching for music....................................40
Playlists .....................................................41
Track list ...................................................42
Skipping to the previous/next track..............42
Fast forward/reverse ..................................42
Repeating a track .......................................42
Switching the shuffle function on/off ............42
Adapting the volume for iPod mode..............42
USB ............................................................ 43
Calling up the main menu for USB mode ...... 44
Searching for a track ................................. 44
Track list................................................... 46
Skipping to the previous/next track............. 46
Fast forward/reverse ................................. 46
Repeating a track ...................................... 46
Switching the shuffle function on/off............ 46
Starting/stopping scanning......................... 46
Calling up an external audio source ............. 47
Activating the interface............................... 47
Adapting the volume for an external
audio source ............................................. 47
External Bluetooth® audio source.................. 48
Calling up an external Bluetooth® audio
source/starting playback............................ 48
Activating the interface............................... 48
Skipping a track ........................................ 49
Fast forward/reverse ................................. 49
Repeating a track ...................................... 49
Switching the shuffle function on/off............ 49
Starting/stopping scanning......................... 49
Bluetooth® settings...................................... 49
Calling up Bluetooth® settings .................... 49
Switching Bluetooth® on/off ....................... 49
Adding a new Bluetooth® device ................. 50
Establishing a connection from an
external Bluetooth® device ......................... 50
Setting visibility ........................................ 50
Authorised Bluetooth® devices .................. 50
DISC
33
CD audio/DVD-Audio/DVD-Video
DISC
CAUTION
û Always touch the CD/DVD at the edges only. Never touch the side without writing and
keep the CD/DVD clean.
û Never stick anything on the CD/DVD.
û Protect the CD/DVD against direct sunlight
and from heat sources such as heaters,
etc.
û Before playing the CD/DVD, it should be
cleaned with a special, commercially available cleaning cloth, wiping from the centre
outwards. Solvents such as petrol, thinners
or other commercially available cleaning
agents and anti-static sprays must not be
used.
û Do not bend the CD/DVD.
The system may not be able to play copyprotected CDs/DVDs or CDs with CD-ROM
sections that do not correspond to the audio
CD standard.
34
DISC
Notes on copyright
Notes on the media supported
You are only permitted to create copies of CDs/
DVDs for your own private use. The copyright exceptions do not cover circulation of the duplicated
CDs/DVDs to third parties.
To avoid problems when playing your CDs/DVDs,
please note the following:
The music tracks that you can create for and play
in MP3 mode are generally copyright-protected
under the applicable international and national
laws. In many countries, the reproduction of copyrighted material is not permitted, even if only for
personal use, without the express prior consent of
the copyright holder. Please check the current
copyright laws for your country and comply with
them. These restrictions do not apply,
for example, to your own compositions and recordings or to recordings for which authorisation
has been obtained from the copyright holder.
The most current laws always apply!
– Permissible media:
CD-R and CD-RW (650 MB and 700 MB)
DVD+R and DVD+RW
DVD-R and DVD-RW
– Permissible file systems:
CD-ROM (Yellow Book)/ISO 9660 Level 1/
Joliet for CD (filenames max. 64 characters)
– Permissible file structures:
The maximum number of tracks per disc is
4,000.
A disc may hold a maximum of 2,000 folders
in total.
Each folder in turn may contain a maximum of
1,000 tracks.
The maximum directory depth is 11 levels.
No warranty is accepted for:
–
–
–
–
–
poor quality user-burned CDs/DVDs,
CDs of other formats,
Mixed Mode CDs,
CD-Extra CDs as well as
multi-session CDs/DVDs.
CDs/DVDs that have not been finalised cannot be
played.
Insertion of a non-standard CD/DVD format such
as DVD-Plus (one side audio CD, the other side
DVD) may lead to irreparable damage of the
drive due to the greater thickness of the media.
Supported audio formats
The PCM supports the following audio formats:
MP3 *
(MPEG1 Audio Layer 3)
WMA *
(Windows Media Audio)
AAC-LC *(Low Complexity
Advanced Audio Coding)
WAVE file format *
DTS **
(Digital Theater Systems)
®
Dolby Digital ***
Meridian Lossless Packing ****
*) No guarantee can be made that all MP3, WMA,
AAC and WAV formats can be played back, due to
the wide variety of different audio programmes
(encoders) available.
**) Manufactured under licence in accordance
with US patents No. 5.451.942, 5.956.674,
5.974.380, 5.978.762, 6.487.535 and other
patents issued and registered in the USA and internationally. DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks and the DTS logos and the
DTS symbol are trademarks of DTS, Inc. © 19962008 DTS, Inc. All rights reserved.
***) The double D symbol is a legally protected
trademark of Dolby Laboratories.
Notes on DVD mode
Video DVDs generally feature a regional code. Information on this can usually be found either on
the DVD itself or on the DVD sleeve.
The CD/DVD drive of the PCM detects the respective regional code of the video DVD inserted. As
per the “Regional Protection Code”, it allows you
to change the regional code up to five times.
Please contact your Porsche partner to find out
how to change the regional code.
You will find a list of regional codes in the section
“Regional codes for video DVDs” on page 203.
When playing video DVDs, only playback of the audio information is supported.
Some of the video DVDs you find in stores may not
conform to the standards. You may experience
sound or other playback problems with these
DVDs.
Discs, DVD authoring software, burning software
and burners are widely available. Due to this wide
variety, we cannot guarantee that the CD/DVD
drive of the PCM will be able to play every userburned video DVD.
****) MLP LosslessTH is a trademark of Dolby
Laboratories.
DISC
35
Calling up the CD/DVD changer menu
û Briefly press the j button.
The CD/DVD changer menu is displayed. A button is displayed for each compartment in the
changer magazine.
Loading and ejecting CDs/DVDs
Loading a disc in a PCM with CD/DVD drive
û Insert the disc into the CD/DVD slot with the
printed side facing upwards.
Incorrectly inserted CDs/DVDs will not be played.
Ejecting a disc in a PCM with
CD/DVD drive
û Briefly press the j button.
The CD/DVD is stopped and ejected.
The system automatically switches to the current
audio source in TUNER mode as soon as you have
removed the CD/DVD from the magazine compartment.
36
DISC
If there is a CD or DVD in the compartment, you
will see the title of the CD/DVD on the button (if
available).
If the title of the CD/DVD is not available, the format of the disc (CD or DVD) is indicated instead.
If a compartment is empty, “empty” is shown beside the compartment number on the display.
Loading a disc in a PCM with
CD/DVD changer
Incorrectly inserted CDs/DVDs will not be played.
To allow for the fastest possible changes, you
should load the magazine successively beginning
with compartment 1.
1. Briefly press the j button.
The CD/DVD changer menu is displayed.
2. Select an empty magazine compartment.
You are then prompted to insert a disc.
3. Push the CD/DVD into the slot.
The printed side of the CD/DVD must face upwards.
Incorrectly inserted CDs/DVDs will not be
played.
“DISC” flashes on the button. As soon as the CD/
DVD is detected, it is scanned and the current
track is shown on the display.
Loading all discs in a PCM with empty
CD/DVD changer
û Press and hold the j button or any magazine compartment for several seconds.
All magazine compartments are moved into
position one after the other and at each stage
you are prompted to insert a CD/DVD.
Ejecting a disc in a PCM with
CD/DVD changer
1. Briefly press the j button.
The CD/DVD changer menu is displayed.
2. Select the magazine compartment you want.
The CD/DVD is stopped if necessary and ejected.
3. Remove the CD/DVD.
If you do not insert another CD/DVD in this
magazine compartment, the CD/DVD in the
next occupied compartment is played.
 If you do not remove the CD/DVD from the
slot, the PCM will automatically retract it after
a short while.
Ejecting all discs in a PCM with
CD/DVD changer
û Press and hold the j button or any magazine compartment for several seconds.
All discs are ejected in sequence.
The system automatically switches to the current
audio source in TUNER mode as soon as you have
removed the last CD/DVD from the magazine
compartment.
Calling up the main menu for CD/DVD
mode
û Press the n button repeatedly until the
“DISC” audio source is highlighted in the bottom line.
Selecting a CD/DVD
1. Press the n button repeatedly until the
“DISC” audio source is highlighted in the bottom line.
2. Select “Disc selection”.
A list of the available CDs/DVDs is opened.
3. Select the CD/DVD you want.
Playback is started at the beginning of the
disc.
Selecting a track
You can select a track directly using the track list.
The track list shows the track numbers and, if
available, the track names.
1. Press the n button repeatedly until the
“DISC” audio source is highlighted in the bottom line.
2. Select “Track list”.
3. Select the track you want.
Selecting a track (MP3 CD/DVD)
If the disc currently playing is an MP3 CD/DVD, the
track list shows the names of the root directories
as well as the subdirectories.
The following symbols are used in the track list to
make it easier for you to navigate within the directory structure of the MP3 CD/DVD:
– Subdirectory
Selecting this list entry opens the corresponding subdirectory and displays the directories
and tracks it contains.
– Higher-level directory
Selecting this list entry or pressing
the h button displays the higher-level directory.
– Playlist
Selecting this list entry allows you to play lists
of tracks in m3u format you have created on
your computer and burned to the CD/DVD.
1. Press the n button repeatedly until the
“DISC” audio source is highlighted in the bottom line.
2. Select “Track list”.
3. Select the directory or playlist you want.
4. Select the track you want.
DISC
37
 If the directory structure of the folders is very
deep or the number of files is very large, it
may not be possible to display all the folders
or tracks.
File formats that cannot be played will not be
displayed.
To find out more, please refer also to the section “Notes on the media supported” on
page 34.
Selecting a chapter in video DVD mode
When playing video DVDs, only playback of the audio information is supported.
1. Press the n button repeatedly until the
“DISC” audio source is highlighted in the bottom line.
2. Select “Track list”.
3. Select the chapter you want.
- or if you want to choose a chapter in another film
title 3 Select the first list entry with the “higher-level
directory” symbol
The list of video titles is opened.
4. Select the video title you want.
5. Select the chapter you want.
38
DISC
Setting the audio format for video DVD
Setting audio groups (DVD-Audio)
1. Press the n button repeatedly until the
“DISC” audio source is highlighted in the bottom line.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “DVD audio format”.
A list of the available audio formats is opened.
4. Select the audio format you want.
1. Press the n button repeatedly until the
“DISC” audio source is highlighted in the bottom line.
2. Select “Track list”.
3. Select the first list entry with the “higher-level
directory” symbol
The list of audio groups is opened.
4. Select the audio group you want.
5. Select the track you want within the audio
group.
 After selecting a new audio format from the
list, playback is resumed at the same point in
the current chapter if possible. If this is not
possible, the current chapter is played once
again from the beginning.
All following tracks are also played with the
newly set audio format. If this is not possible
with a track, playback reverts to the originally
set audio format. This format is then retained
for the subsequent tracks.
Naming a CD
 This function is only available for audio CDs
and DTS-CDs without CD text.
A maximum of 100 CDs can be named.
1. Press the n button repeatedly until the
“DISC” audio source is highlighted in the bottom line.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Name CD”.
The input menu is opened.
4. Enter the name you want for the CD.
Skipping to the previous/next track
If the current track has been playing for longer
than 10 seconds, pressing the p button resumes
playback from the start of the current track.
If the current track has not yet been playing for
10 seconds, playback is resumed from the start
of the previous track.
û If you want to skip to the next track when a CD/
DVD is playing, briefly press the o button.
û If you want to skip back to the start of the track
when a CD/DVD is playing, briefly press the p
button.
û Select “Repeat” while a CD/DVD is playing to
activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.
- or to switch it off -
û Press the p or o button.
Switching the shuffle function on/off
When you activate this function, the current track
is played to the end. The current CD/DVD is then
played in random order.
û Select “Shuffle” while a CD/DVD is playing to
activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.
Fast forward/reverse
Starting/stopping scanning
û Press and hold the o button or p button for a
few seconds when a CD/DVD is playing until
the position you want is reached.
When this function is activated, each track on the
CD/DVD or each chapter on a video DVD is played
for approx. 10 seconds.
Repeating a track
1. Press the n button repeatedly until the
“DISC” audio source is highlighted in the bottom line.
2. Select “Start scan” to activate the function.
Activating this function repeats the current track
or chapter (video DVD mode).
3. Select “Stop scan” to deactivate the function.
The CD/DVD track that has started playing will
continue to play.
The function is automatically stopped as soon as
a track is selected directly in the track list.
Searching for music in MP3 mode
(full text search)
The music search in MP3 mode is based on a full
text search of the file names.
1. Press the n button repeatedly until the
“DISC” audio source is highlighted in the bottom line.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Full text search”.
The input menu is opened.
 The menu item is only available when the track
list is available.
4. Enter at least three letters of the search term.
5. Call up the search results by selecting “List”.
6. Select the track you want in the result list.
The track is played.
DISC
39
*) iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. and
is registered in the USA and in other countries.
**) Compatibility of later iPod models with the
PCM cannot be guaranteed.
û Press the n button repeatedly until the
“iPod” audio source is highlighted in the bottom line.
 If you encounter any problems it may be necessary to update your iPod’s firmware.
 The “iPod” mode is only displayed if a corresponding device is connected to the interface.
 It is recommended not to leave an iPod in the
vehicle for long periods of time as extreme
ambient conditions (temperature, humidity)
can occur in vehicles.
The iPod charges during use.
iPod jack
iPod*
You can connect one of the following iPod models
with your PCM via a jack in the centre console of
your vehicle using the connecting cable supplied:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
iPod 4th generation,
iPod 5th generation (video),
iPod nano,
iPod nano 2nd generation as well as
iPod mini,
iPod photo,
later iPod models**.
40
DISC
Calling up the main menu for iPod mode
 For proper operation of an iPod or iPhone on
the PCM, including the charging function, both
connectors must be attached to the media interface.
Searching for music
You can search for specific tracks on your iPod.
The following categories are available to you for
this:
– Artists
Displays a list of all available artists. If you select an artist from the list, the number of tracks
and albums available for the subsequent
search is updated and displayed after the
menu item.
– Albums
Displays a list of the available albums. If you
have already selected an artist, only albums by
that artist will be available for the subsequent
search.
If you select an album from the list, the number
of tracks available for the subsequent search
is updated.
– Track
Displays a list of all tracks stored on the iPod.
If you have already selected a category
(e.g. “Artists”), the list of tracks will have been
automatically updated and only tracks by that
artist will be available.
– Music genres
The tracks stored on the iPod are generally assigned to a music genre (provided the “Genre”
ID3 tag has been assigned). These music genres can also be used as categories for a
search.
If you have selected a music genre, the artists,
albums and tracks available for the subsequent search are updated.
Once you select a category, higher-level categories are no longer available. After you select an
artist, for example, the “Music genres” category
can no longer be selected.
Selecting “Start playback” ends the search and
plays the tracks in accordance with your previous
selection.
Below is an example of how to perform a search
for the tracks of a specific artist and album.
1. Press the n button repeatedly until the
“iPod” audio source is highlighted in the bottom line.
2. Select “Find music” in iPod mode.
3. Select “Artists”.
A list of all the artists whose tracks are stored
on the iPod is opened.
4. Select the artist you want in the list.
5. Select “Albums”.
A list of all the albums by the selected artist
stored on the iPod is opened.
6. Select the album you want in the list.
The number of tracks on this album is now
shown in brackets on the “Track” button.
7. Select “Start playback”.
The tracks on the selected album are now
played one after the other.
 The tracks from a music search are displayed
in the track list. To find out more, please refer
also to the section “Track list” on page 42.
The iPod determines the sorting of the lists.
Playlists
Selecting this list entry allows you to play lists of
tracks you have stored on your iPod.
1. Press the n button repeatedly until the
“iPod” audio source is highlighted in the bottom line.
2. Select “Playlists”.
The menu is opened.
3. Select the playlist you want.
The tracks in the list are played one after the
other. After the last track is played, the playlist
is automatically repeated.
DISC
41
Track list
If you have performed a music search or selected
a playlist, the corresponding tracks are displayed
in the track list.
Fast forward/reverse
û Press the o button or p button when the iPod is
playing until the position you want is reached.
 The iPod determines the sorting of the lists.
Repeating a track
1. Press the n button repeatedly until the
“iPod” audio source is highlighted in the bottom line.
2. Select “Track list”.
The menu is opened.
3. Select the track you want.
The track is played.
Activating this function repeats the current track.
Skipping to the previous/next track
û If you want to skip to the next track when the
iPod is playing, briefly press the o button.
û If you want to skip back to the start of the track
when the iPod is playing, briefly press the p
button.
42
DISC
û Select “Repeat” when the iPod is playing to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.
- or to switch it off -
û Press the p or o button.
Switching the shuffle function on/off
When you activate this function, the current track
in the music selection is played to the end. All
tracks in the current music selection are then
played in random order.
û Select “Shuffle” when the iPod is playing to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.
Adapting the volume for iPod mode
 You will only be able to access the “SET DISC
/ AUX” menu if there is at least one audio
source from the DISC area available.
1. Press the n button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET DISC / AUX”
> “Volume adaptation”
> “Volume iPod”.
4. Make the setting you want by selecting the
symbols
and
or by turning q the
right rotary knob.
You can use it to:
Notes on the media supported
– play audio data from your USB stick
(permitted formats: MP3, WAV, WMA and AACLC),
– download data from the Sport display as well
as
– download data from the PCM logbook.
To avoid problems when playing your USB devices, please note the following:
 You cannot connect USB devices that require
the installation of special drivers. The use of a
USB hub is not permitted.
 Compatibility with all memory sticks and MP3
players cannot be guaranteed due to the rapid rate at which USB media are developing.
USB jack
USB
You can connect a USB memory stick or a USB
MP3 player containing audio files to the USB interface of the PCM in the centre console.
 USB devices with increased power requirements (e.g. external hard drives) cannot be
operated on the USB interface in some circumstances.
– Permissible media:
USB mass storage device,
USB MP3 player (to MTP standard)
– Permissible file systems:
USB devices with the file systems FAT 16 and
FAT 32 are supported.
– Permissible USB standards:
USB devices that meet the USB 2.0 specifications are supported.
– Permissible file structures:
Up to 10,000 tracks are supported on the USB
device.
 It is recommended not to leave USB devices
in the vehicle for long periods of time as extreme ambient conditions (temperature, humidity) can occur in vehicles.
DISC
43
Calling up the main menu for USB mode
û Press the n button repeatedly until the
“USB” audio source is highlighted in the bottom line.
 The “USB” mode is only displayed if a corresponding device is connected to the interface.
 The first time USB mode is activated, the audio files in the USB memory are loaded. The
menu cannot be used and the menu items are
greyed out during this process. Playback begins as soon as the first tracks are found on
the USB device.
Searching for a track
You can search for specific tracks on your USB device. The following options are available to you for
this:
– search for tracks using categories
(“Find music”),
– search for similar tracks to the track currently
playing using categories
(“Play more from”)
and
– search for tracks using a “Full text search”.
44
DISC
 The music search only works if metadata for
the tracks (ID3 tags) is available.
A database is created in the PCM for the music search. This can take a few minutes.
The tracks from a music search are compiled in a
playlist named “Tracks from music search” under
the “Track list” menu item.
Searching for tracks by category
You can compile the tracks you want using the following categories:
– Artist
Displays a list of all artists. If you select an artist from the list, the number of tracks available
for the subsequent search is updated.
If you select “All artists” you can also search
using the input menu.
– Album
Displays a list of the available albums. If you
have already selected a category
(e.g. “Artists”), only albums by that artist will
be available for the subsequent search.
If you select an album from the list, the number
of tracks available for the subsequent search
is updated.
If you select “All albums” you can also search
using the input menu.
– Track
Displays a list of all tracks stored on the USB
device. If you have already selected a category
(e.g. “Artists”), the list of tracks will have been
automatically updated and only tracks by that
artist will be available.
If you select “All tracks” you can also search
using the input menu.
– Music genres
The tracks stored on the USB device are generally assigned to a music genre (provided the
“Genre” ID3 tag has been assigned). These
music genres can also be used as categories
for a search.
These categories can be used either individually
or in succession for the search. The remaining
number of entries is updated.
In contrast to the music search in iPod mode, the
categories can be set in any order.
Selecting “Start playback” ends the search and
plays the tracks in accordance with your previous
selection.
Below is an example of how to perform a search
for tracks by a specific artist on a specific album.
1. Press the n button repeatedly until the
“USB” audio source is highlighted in the bottom line.
2. Select “Find music” in USB mode.
3. Select “Artists”.
A list of all available artists whose tracks are
stored on the USB device is opened. Highlight
the artist you want by selecting in the list.
4. Select the artist you want in the list.
5. Select “Albums”.
A list of all albums by the selected artist stored
on the USB device is opened.
6. Select the album you want in the list.
The number of tracks on this album is now
shown in brackets on the “Track” button.
7. Select “Start playback”.
The tracks on the selected album are now
played one after the other.
Searching for similar tracks by category
1. Press the n button repeatedly until the
“USB” audio source is highlighted in the bottom line.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Play more from”.
You can now choose between the following categories:
– “Artist”,
– “Album” and
– “Genre”.
4. Select the category you want.
The corresponding tracks are played one after
the other.
 In some cases, no further tracks may be
found for the selected category.
1. Press the n button repeatedly until the
“USB” audio source is highlighted in the bottom line.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Full text search”.
The input menu is opened.
4. Enter at least three letters of the search term.
5. Call up the search results by selecting “List”.
In the result list, symbols are used to distinguish
between an artist, track or album:
Artist
Album
Track
6. Select the artist/album/track you want in the
result list.
The selection is played.
Searching for tracks using a full text search
The full text search function gives you quick access to specific tracks. It is suitable for the following situations:
– there is no metadata (ID3 tags) on your USB
device,
– there are a large number of tracks stored on
your USB device and a search using filters
would produce very long result lists or
– you do not know the exact name of the track/
artist you want.
DISC
45
Track list
Skipping to the previous/next track
Switching the shuffle function on/off
The tracks and playlists stored on the USB device
are displayed in alphabetical order in the track list.
To find out more about using the track list, please
refer to the section “Selecting a track (MP3 CD/
DVD)” on page 37.
If the current track has been playing for longer
than 10 seconds, pressing the p button resumes
playback from the start of the current track.
If the current track has not yet been playing for
10 seconds, playback is resumed from the start
of the previous track.
When you activate this function, the current track
is played to the end. All tracks in the current music
selection are then played in random order.
1. Press the n button repeatedly until the
“USB” audio source is highlighted in the bottom line.
2. Select “Track list”.
The menu is opened.
3. Select the track you want.
The track is played.
- or Select the playlist and then the track you want.
The track is played.
 If the directory structure of the folders is very
deep or the number of files is very large, it
may not be possible to display all of the folders or tracks.
File formats that cannot be played will not be
displayed.
û If you want to skip to the next track in USB
mode, briefly press the o button.
û If you want to skip back to the start of the track
in USB mode, briefly press the p button.
Fast forward/reverse
û Press the o button or p button in USB mode until the position you want is reached.
Repeating a track
Activating this function repeats the current track.
û Select “Repeat” in USB mode to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
- or to switch it off -
û Press the p or o button.
46
DISC
û Select “Shuffle” in USB mode to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
The shuffle function is automatically deactivated
as soon as a new music search is started.
Starting/stopping scanning
When this function is activated, each track from
the USB device or the current music selection is
played for approx. 10 seconds.
1. Press the n button repeatedly until the
“USB” audio source is highlighted in the bottom line.
2. Select “Start scan” to activate the function.
3. Select “Stop scan” to deactivate the function.
The track on the USB device that has started
playing continues to be played.
The function is automatically stopped as soon as
a track is selected directly in the track list or a music search is performed.
WARNING!
Accident hazard. Distraction could result in
you losing control of the vehicle.
û Operate the external audio source only
when you are safely in control of your vehicle and traffic conditions permit. If in doubt,
stop the vehicle and operate the external
audio source while the vehicle is parked.
Calling up an external audio source
û Press the n button repeatedly until the
“AUX” audio source is highlighted in the bottom line.
3. Select “SET DISC / AUX”.
You will only be able to access the “SET DISC /
AUX” menu if there is at least one CD/DVD inserted or at least one audio source activated
( ) in the menu.
4. Select “AUX” to activate ( ) or deactivate ( )
the function.
Adapting the volume for an external audio
source
 Volume control should mainly be performed
on the external audio source to avoid large differences in volume (particularly increases)
when changing the audio source.
Recommendation:
AUX jack
External audio source
You can use the AUX interface to connect an external audio source that is operated on the source itself rather than on the PCM. Please refer to the operating manual for the relevant device.
Activating the interface
To be able to select a connected external audio
source with the n button, the interface must
be activated in the SET menu.
1. Press the n button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
û Set the maximum volume on the external
audio source.
û Then set the volume you want on the PCM.
You can also adapt the volume of the external
audio source to the volume of the PCM.
DISC
47
 You will only be able to access the “SET DISC
/ AUX” menu if there is at least one audio
source from the DISC area available.
1. Press the n button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET DISC / AUX”
> “Volume adaptation”
> “Volume AUX”.
4. Make the setting you want by selecting the
symbols
and
or by turning q the
right rotary knob.
External Bluetooth® audio source
You can also connect an external audio source
that is partially operated on the source itself rather than on the PCM via a Bluetooth® connection.
 For the connection and operation of the external Bluetooth® audio source, the PCM also
supports the A2DP/AVRCP profile.
The extent to which the external Bluetooth®
audio source can be operated on the PCM depends on the functions supported by the audio source. Operation of the external Bluetooth® audio source on the PCM is therefore
restricted in some cases. In other cases, operation on the PCM is not possible. The audio
source is then operated on the connected device itself. Please refer to the operating manual for the relevant device.
WARNING!
Accident hazard. Distraction could result in
you losing control of the vehicle.
û Operate the external audio source only
when you are safely in control of your vehicle and traffic conditions permit. If in doubt,
stop the vehicle and operate the external
audio source while the vehicle is parked.
48
DISC
Calling up an external Bluetooth® audio
source/starting playback
û Press the n button repeatedly until the
“AUX BT” audio source is highlighted in the bottom line.
Playback starts automatically if this is supported by the Bluetooth® device. It may be necessary to start playback manually on the Bluetooth® device.
 The “AUX BT” mode is only displayed if a corresponding device is connected to the interface.
Activating the interface
To use an external Bluetooth® audio source, the
AUX Bluetooth function must be activated in the
“SET DISC / AUX” menu.
1. Press the n button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET DISC / AUX”.
You will only be able to access the “SET DISC /
AUX” menu if there is at least one CD/DVD inserted or at least one audio source activated
( ) in the menu.
4. Select “AUX Bluetooth” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
When you deactivate “AUX Bluetooth”, the
Bluetooth® devices are deleted from the list if
necessary.
 With some devices, it may be necessary to
set the volume on the device.
Recommendation:
û Set the required volume on the external
Bluetooth® audio source.
û Then set the volume you want on the PCM.
 The functions and displays depend on the active Bluetooth® device.
Skipping a track
û If you want to skip to the next track, briefly
press the o button.
û If you want to skip back to the start of the
track/to the previous track, briefly press the p
button.
Fast forward/reverse
û Press the o button or p button in AUX BT mode
until the position you want is reached.
Repeating a track
Activating this function repeats the current track.
û Select “Repeat” in Bluetooth® AUX mode to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.
- or to switch it off -
û Press the p or o button.
Switching the shuffle function on/off
When you activate this function, the current track
is played to the end. All tracks are then played in
random order.
û Select “Shuffle” in Bluetooth® AUX mode to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.
Starting/stopping scanning
When this function is activated, each track from
the external audio source is played for approx.
10 seconds.
1. Press the n button repeatedly until the
“AUX BT” audio source is highlighted in the bottom line.
2. Select “Start scan” to activate the function.
3. Select “Stop scan” to deactivate the function.
The track from the external audio source that
has started playing will continue to play.
Bluetooth® settings
Calling up Bluetooth® settings
1. Press the n button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET DISC / AUX”
> “Bluetooth settings”.
 You will only be able to access the “SET DISC
/ AUX” menu if there is at least one audio
source from the DISC area available.
Switching Bluetooth® on/off
Switching Bluetooth® on
û Select “Switch on Bluetooth” in the Bluetooth®
settings.
Switching Bluetooth® off
û Select “Switch off Bluetooth” in the Bluetooth®
settings.
DISC
49
Adding a new Bluetooth® device
Authorised Bluetooth® devices
Renaming an authorised Bluetooth® device
For the PCM to find your Bluetooth® device,
please ensure that the Bluetooth® function on the
device has been activated and set to “visible”.
This function allows you to display a list of the
Bluetooth® devices currently authorised to connect with your PCM. The list contains all authorised MP3 players
û Select “List of MP3 players” in the Bluetooth®
settings.
1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth®
settings.
2. Select the device you want in the list.
3. Select “Rename”.
The input menu is opened.
4. Enter the name you want and confirm by selecting “OK”.
The name of the device is now changed in the
PCM.
Connecting an authorised Bluetooth® device
with the PCM
Deleting an authorised Bluetooth® device
from the list
1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth®
settings.
2. Select the device you want in the list.
3. Select “Connect”.
1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth®
settings.
2. Select the device you want in the list.
3. Select “Delete”.
4. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting
“Yes”.
1. Select “New MP3 player” in the Bluetooth®
settings.
A search is started and a list of the devices
found is displayed.
2. Choose the device you want by selecting it in
the list.
A Bluetooth® code is displayed that you must
enter in the corresponding Bluetooth® device.
Once you have entered the code, successful
authorisation of the device is shown on the display.
Establishing a connection from an
external Bluetooth® device
To find out more, please refer to the section “Establishing a connection from an external Bluetooth® device” on page 69.
Setting visibility
To find out more, please refer to the section “Setting visibility” on page 69.
50
DISC
Displaying authorised Bluetooth® devices
Disconnecting an authorised and connected
Bluetooth® device from the PCM
1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth®
settings.
2. Select the device you want in the list.
3. Select “Disconnect”.
Deleting the list of authorised Bluetooth®
devices
1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth®
settings.
2. Select any device in the list.
3. Select “Delete”.
4. Select “Delete list”.
5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting
“Delete all”.
Displaying details for the authorised
Bluetooth® device
1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth®
settings.
2. Select any device in the list.
3. Select “Device details”.
The following information is displayed:
– the device name,
– the Bluetooth® address as well as
– the supported services.
DISC
51
PHONE
Bluetooth® ................................................. 54
Prerequisites for the mobile phone .............. 55
Hands-free quality....................................... 55
Interruptions to the connection while driving . 55
Switching Bluetooth® on/off........................ 56
Operating the Bluetooth® hands-free unit
(Bluetooth® mobile phone preparation) .... 56
Authorising a mobile phone ......................... 56
Establishing a connection from an
external Bluetooth® device.......................... 57
Conducting calls......................................... 58
Temporarily muting the
hands-free microphone ............................... 58
Accepting a call ......................................... 58
Ending a call .............................................. 59
Rejecting a call........................................... 59
Dialling a number ....................................... 60
Using the quick dial (redial) function ............. 60
Using the direct dial function ....................... 60
Holding a call ............................................. 60
Phonebook ................................................ 60
List of previous calls................................... 61
List of received calls................................... 62
Touch tone dialling (DTMF tones) ................. 63
Establishing an additional call ...................... 63
Call waiting ................................................ 64
Call waiting (swapping) and conference ........ 65
Speed dialling ............................................ 65
52
PHONE
Telephone settings
(Bluetooth® mobile phone preparation) ...........66
Setting the ringtone type.............................66
Setting the ringtone volume.........................66
Setting the call volume................................66
Setting the microphone volume ...................66
Switching 3-way calling on/off .....................66
Bluetooth® settings (Bluetooth® mobile
phone preparation)........................................67
Authorised Bluetooth® devices ...................67
Adding a new Bluetooth® device..................68
Establishing a connection from an
external Bluetooth® device..........................69
Setting visibility ..........................................69
Phonebook settings
(Bluetooth® mobile phone preparation) ...........70
Setting the memory for the phonebook ........70
Setting sorting ...........................................70
Setting automatic transfer of
the phonebook ...........................................70
Transferring the phonebook...........................71
Transferring the phonebook
entries manually .........................................71
Deleting the phonebook ..............................71
Operating the PCM telephone ...................72
Inserting the SIM card in the PCM ................72
Entering the PIN .........................................73
Conducting calls.........................................73
Temporarily muting the
hands-free microphone ...............................73
Accepting a call .........................................74
Ending a call ..............................................74
Rejecting a call...........................................75
Dialling a number........................................75
Using the quick dial (redial) function .............75
Using the direct dial function .......................75
Holding a call .............................................76
PCM phonebook .........................................76
List of previous calls ...................................78
List of received calls...................................79
Touch tone dialling (DTMF tones) .................80
Establishing an additional call ......................81
Call waiting ................................................81
Call waiting (swapping) and conference ........82
Using supplementary services .....................83
Making an emergency call ...........................83
Text messages (SMS)
(with PCM telephone only).............................. 83
Reading a text message ............................ 84
Replying to a text message ......................... 84
Creating and sending a new text message ... 85
Forwarding a text message ......................... 87
Deleting a text message ............................ 87
Reading a vCard......................................... 87
Accepting vCards ....................................... 88
Editing vCard details................................... 88
Discarding (deleting) vCards........................ 89
Numbers in text messages.......................... 89
Displaying the complete text ....................... 90
Creating a template .................................... 90
Telephone settings
(PCM telephone) ........................................... 91
Switching the PCM telephone on/off ............ 91
Setting ringtones........................................ 91
Selecting a network.................................... 91
Displaying the IMEI ..................................... 92
Switching 3-way calling on/off ..................... 92
SIM settings .............................................. 92
Call settings
(PCM telephone) ........................................... 93
Activating call forwarding ............................ 93
Switching the “Call waiting” function on/off ... 94
Switching the “Redial” function on/off........... 95
Setting transfer of your own number ............ 95
Setting automatic call answering ................. 95
Bluetooth® settings
(PCM telephone)............................................95
Authorised Bluetooth® devices ...................95
Adding a new Bluetooth® device..................97
Setting visibility .........................................98
Finding the cordless handset .......................98
Phonebook settings ......................................98
Setting the memory for the phonebook ........98
Setting sorting ...........................................99
Setting automatic transfer of
the phonebook ...........................................99
Transferring the phonebook ......................100
Deleting the phonebook ............................100
Settings for messages and data
(PCM telephone)..........................................100
Changing the number of the
SMS service centre ..................................100
Switching the SMS signal tone on/off .........100
Cordless handset ........................................101
Switching the cordless handset on/off .......101
Charging the cordless handset ..................101
General operation .....................................101
Accepting a call........................................102
Ending a call ............................................102
Rejecting a call.........................................102
Dialling a number......................................102
Temporarily muting the
handset microphone .................................102
Establishing an additional call ....................102
Call waiting (swapping) and conference ......103
Phonebook...............................................104
Text messages (SMS) ...............................105
Settings...................................................107
PHONE
53
PHONE
The PCM can be equipped with an integrated car
phone (PCM telephone) as an optional accessory.
This car phone (PCM telephone) is a quadband
GSM radio telephone (GSM 850/900/1800/
1900) with hands-free unit and a cordless handset. It conforms to the GSM standard (Global System for Mobile communication) currently implemented in more than 100 countries.
For information on the current GSM coverage and
planned expansion of the coverage areas of GSM
networks, contact your network provider.
Your PCM also offers a facility for the connection,
operation and hands-free operation of an external
telephone (mobile phone) via a Bluetooth® connection.
An alternative equipment version (Bluetooth® mobile phone preparation) does not include a PCM
telephone, but does still allow you to use the PCM
as a hands-free unit for Bluetooth® mobile
phones.
A list of selected compatible mobile telephones
is available on the Internet at
http://www.porsche.com.
54
PHONE
WARNING!
Injury hazard. The telephone must not be
used near explosives or flammable materials
(e.g. at a petrol station) or near operations involving explosives.
Mobile phones must be switched off in certain
hazardous areas such as near petrol stations,
fuel depots, chemical plants and demolition
work in progress using explosives, for example. They can interfere with technical equipment.
û Please heed appropriate warnings.
û Observe statutory regulations and local restrictions when using the telephone.
Bluetooth®
Bluetooth® is a system for establishing radio connections between electronic devices within a maximum range of 10 metres (approx. 33 feet).
Bluetooth® allows you to use your mobile phone
via the PCM. You can accept, make and end calls.
You use your vehicle’s audio system for hands-free
operation and have access to the contents of your
phonebook.
 Access to the phonebook depends on the
range of functions supported by the mobile
phone used.
The connection is established in different ways depending on the telephone version in your PCM:
– In the case of a PCM with Bluetooth® mobile
phone preparation, connection takes place using the Hands-Free Profile.
When connecting using the Hands-Free Profile,
the PCM simply serves as a Bluetooth®
hands-free unit for the external telephone.
The SIM card of the external telephone cannot
be accessed (e.g. to write a text message) and
the range of functions is restricted accordingly
(depending on the mobile phone used).
– In the case of a PCM with PCM telephone,
connection takes place using the SIM Access
Profile if this profile is supported by the mobile phone used. When connecting using the
SIM Access Profile, the SIM card of the mobile
phone is used for operation of the PCM telephone. The data on the SIM card (phonebook
entries and text messages) is read out by the
PCM and is available for use on the PCM.
The range of functions for a connection using
the SIM Access Profile is largely the same as
the function of the PCM telephone with SIM
card inserted.
If the mobile phone does not support the SIM
Access Profile, connection takes place using
the Hands-Free Profile.
With mobile phones that support both profiles,
it is possible to switch between the connection
types.
 The option of connection using the SIM
Access Profile is not available on all mobile
phones and must also be activated on the device for some mobile phones.
In some countries there may be limitations on
the use of devices with Bluetooth®. Please
contact the local authorities for further information.
Prerequisites for the mobile phone
Hands-free quality
Not all mobile phones are equally suitable for making and receiving calls via the Bluetooth® interface
of the PCM.
The hands-free quality can be impaired by
– You need a mobile phone that supports Bluetooth®.
– The mobile phone must support the HandsFree Profile 1.0 or higher.
– The mobile phone must be switched on and
Bluetooth® must be activated.
– On some mobile phones, the device must also
be rendered “visible” to other devices with
Bluetooth®.
Further information on the settings on your mobile
phone can be found in the manufacturer’s operating instructions.
 Some mobile phones have special characteristics when it comes to Bluetooth® or do not
fully support Bluetooth®. Contact your mobile
phone retailer and, if applicable, download the
latest software onto your mobile phone.
– having the fan on, windows open or the top
down,
– wind and rolling noise,
– mobile phone having a poor network connection,
– vehicle travelling at high speed.
Interruptions to the connection while
driving
Interruptions to the connection may occur if:
– there is inadequate GSM coverage in certain
regions,
– you are switching from one GSM transmitting/
receiving station (GSM cell) to another and
there is no voice channel available in this cell,
– you are using a SIM card that is not compatible
with the available network,
– you are using two SIM cards and the mobile
phone is simultaneously logged into the network with the second SIM card.
PHONE
55
Switching Bluetooth® on/off
Switching Bluetooth® on
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PHONE”
> “Bluetooth settings”.
4. Select “Switch on Bluetooth”.
Switching Bluetooth® off
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PHONE”.
> “Bluetooth settings”.
4. Select “Switch off Bluetooth”.
56
PHONE
Operating the Bluetooth® handsfree unit
(Bluetooth® mobile phone
preparation)
The Bluetooth® hands-free unit allows you to use
the PCM as a hands-free unit for Bluetooth® mobile phones.
 Please note that your mobile phone must support the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Profile for use
with the Bluetooth® hands-free unit.
Authorising a mobile phone
Using the “Find telephone” function you can have
the PCM search for and authorise your mobile
phone. Follow the instructions on the PCM display
for this.
For the PCM to find your Bluetooth® device,
please ensure that the Bluetooth® function on the
device has been activated and set to “visible”.
Further details can be found in the operating manual for your mobile phone.
1. Press the c button.
2. Select “Find telephone”.
A search is started and a list of the devices
found is displayed.
3. Select the device you want in the list.
A Bluetooth® code is displayed, which you
must enter on your mobile phone.
4. Enter the displayed Bluetooth® code on the
mobile phone.
Successful authorisation of the device is
shown on the display and the connection is established.
 With some mobile phones, the connection request by the PCM must be explicitly confirmed
on the mobile phone. This may even have to
be done a number of times in some cases,
for example before transferring the phonebook. To avoid this request, you can authorise
the PCM in your mobile phone’s list of devices. The connection will then be established
automatically in the future, without the need
for further checks.
Further details can be found in the operating
manual for your mobile phone.
To find out more, please refer also to the sections
“Authorised Bluetooth® devices” on page 95 and
“Adding a new Bluetooth® device” on page 97.
Establishing a connection from an
external Bluetooth® device
If the PCM does not find your mobile phone or a
connection attempt by the PCM fails, you can also
start the authorisation from the mobile phone.
1. If another mobile phone is connected with the
PCM, switch off Bluetooth® on the connected
mobile phone to disconnect the connection
with the PCM.
2. Press the c button.
3. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
The PCM is now visible for external devices.
 Please ensure that the Bluetooth® visibility of
the PCM is activated. To find out more, please
refer to the section “Setting visibility” on
page 69.
4. Using the mobile phone, search for audio accessories or devices that support Bluetooth®.
Refer to the manufacturer’s operating instructions to find out how to do this.
5. Select the device “PCM” from the mobile
phone’s search results and establish a connection.
Refer to the manufacturer’s operating instructions to find out how to do this.
6. A request appears on the PCM display.
Select “Accept”.
7. A keypad appears where you enter a four-digit
Bluetooth® code of your choice and confirm
with “OK”.
PHONE
57
8. Enter the same Bluetooth® code on your mobile phone.
Once you have entered the code, successful
authorisation of the device is shown on the display.
9. With many mobile phones, the connection with
the PCM must be explicitly established from
the mobile phone following authorisation. Further details can be found in the operating manual for your mobile phone.
 With some mobile phones, the Bluetooth®
code must be directly provided by the mobile
phone during the connection request. If this is
the case, enter a 4-digit code of your choice
on your mobile phone and confirm it with OK.
You will then be shown a keypad on the PCM
display where you must enter the same code
and confirm it.
Conducting calls
There is a hands-free microphone in the roof control console of the vehicle. This means that you
can conduct all telephone calls without using a
handset.
You control the volume using the left rotary
knob t.
If there is a mobile phone connected to the PCM
using the Hands-Free Profile, the call is normally
conducted using the hands-free unit. It can, however, be transferred to the mobile phone by selecting the “Private” function.
û Select “Private” during the call to activate ( )
or deactivate ( ) the “Private” function.
Temporarily muting the hands-free
microphone
û Select “Mute microphone” during a call to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.
 The microphone can also be muted by:
– briefly pressing u the left rotary knob
- or - (with multi-function steering wheel
with telephone function)
– pressing the left roller on the multi-function
steering wheel.
Accepting a call
As soon as a call comes in, the current audio
source is muted and the selected ringtone is
played. In addition, an appropriate menu is temporarily displayed or an appropriate message is
shown in the bottom line.
If available, the telephone number and name of the
caller are displayed.
58
PHONE
Rejecting a call
You can reject an incoming call by:
û Pressing the End call button k on the PCM.
- or -
û Selecting “Reject” in the call menu.
- or -
û Briefly pressing the left rotary knob u.
You can accept the incoming call in a number of
ways:
û Pressing the Lift handset button l on the
PCM.
- or -
û Selecting “Answer” on the display.
- or -
Ending a call
You can end an active call by:
û Pressing the End call button k on the PCM.
û Selecting the menu item in the instrument cluster using the lower right stalk on the steering
wheel.
- or -
- or - (with multi-function steering wheel with
telephone function)
û Selecting “End call” in the call menu.
- or -
û Pressing the End call button k on the external mobile phone.
û Selecting the menu item in the instrument cluster using the lower right stalk on the steering
wheel.
- or - (with multi-function steering wheel with
telephone function)
û Pressing the Lift handset button l on the
multi-function steering wheel.
- or -
- or -
- or -
û Pressing the Lift handset button l on the external mobile phone.
û Pressing the End call button k on the external mobile phone.
- or -
û Pressing the End call button k on the multifunction steering wheel.
û Selecting the menu item in the instrument cluster using the lower right stalk on the steering
wheel.
- or - (with multi-function steering wheel with
telephone function)
û Pressing the End call button k on the multifunction steering wheel.
PHONE
59
Using the quick dial (redial) function
Pressing the Lift handset button l on the PCM
opens the quick dial menu. This menu contains a
list of previous calls.
Dialling a number
1. Press the c button.
The PHONE main menu appears.
2. Select “Dial number”.
The input menu for telephone numbers is
opened. The input field for the telephone
number is blank.
3. Select the individual digits in the telephone
number one after the other.
4. Select “Call number”.
The telephone call is established and the call
menu is displayed.
 Always enter the telephone number with the
dialling code.
60
PHONE
1. Press the Lift handset button l on the PCM.
2. Select the person you want to talk to.
3. Select “Call number” or press the Lift handset
button l on the PCM again.
- or Select the first list entry, “Dial number”.
The input menu for telephone numbers opens.
4. Enter the telephone number you want.
5. Select “Call number”.
Holding a call
û You can hold an active call by pressing the Lift
handset button l on the PCM.
The menu items “New call”, “Take call” and
“End call” are then available for you to select.
û To continue the call, press the Lift handset button l on the PCM again.
Phonebook
If a telephone number is displayed in a menu and
is highlighted, the number is dialled directly if you
After a Bluetooth® connection has been established between the PCM and the mobile phone, the
PCM attempts to transfer the phonebook data
from the mobile phone. You can prevent this automatic phonebook transfer by deactivating the “Auto update” function. To find out more, please refer
to the section “Setting automatic transfer of the
phonebook” on page 70.
- or -
Displaying the phonebook
Using the direct dial function
û press the Lift handset button l on the PCM
û touch the displayed number for at least one
second.
1. Press the c button.
The PHONE main menu appears.
2. Select “Phonebook”.
The phonebook is opened.
Calling a phonebook entry
List of previous calls
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the c button.
Select “Phonebook”.
Select the phonebook entry you want.
If there is more than one number stored for this
entry, select the number you want.
5. Select “Call number”.
The number you want is dialled.
When a mobile phone is connected to the PCM via
a Bluetooth® connection, the mobile phone’s call
lists are transferred and displayed after the connection has been established. The last number dialled appears at the top of the list.
Sending a vCard
If one of the telephone numbers matches an entry
from your phonebook, the name of the person
called is displayed instead of the telephone
number.
You can send phonebook entries directly as
vCards. A vCard is an “electronic visiting card” that
a recipient can accept directly into his or her
phonebook.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the c button.
Select “Phonebook”.
Select the phonebook entry you want.
Select “Send vCard”.
The list of known devices that are suitable for
a transfer is displayed. If the device you want
is not there, you can search for further devices. To do this, press “New data device” (see
also the section “Adding a new Bluetooth® device” on page 97).
As soon as the search is complete, a list containing the devices found is displayed. Once
you have selected a device in this list, a connection is established and the vCard is sent.
 The transfer of the phonebook and call lists is
not supported by all mobile phones.
Displaying the list
1. Press the c button.
2. Select “Previous calls”.
The list of previous calls is displayed with the
time and date of the calls, if this information is
available in the PCM.
Calling a number from the list of previous
calls
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the c button.
Select “Previous calls”.
Select the number you want.
Select “Call number”.
Deleting a number from the list of previous
calls
 Entries transferred from the mobile phone
cannot be deleted in the PCM.
Please delete the entries on your mobile
phone.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the c button.
Select “Previous calls”.
Select the number you want.
Select “Delete”.
Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting
“Yes”.
The number is deleted from the list.
PHONE
61
Adding to a number from the list of previous
calls
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the c button.
Select “Previous calls”.
Select the number you want.
Select “Add to number”.
The input menu is opened and the number is
shown in the input field ready for editing.
5. Make the change you want.
6. Select “Call number”.
The telephone number stored in the list is not
changed.
List of received calls
When a mobile phone is connected to the PCM via
a Bluetooth® connection, the mobile phone’s call
lists are transferred and displayed after the connection has been established. The last call received appears at the top of the list.
 The transfer of the phonebook and call lists is
not supported by all mobile phones.
62
PHONE
 If the date and time information for the individual calls is not transferred from the mobile
phone, the list begins with the unanswered
calls. These are then followed by the accepted calls.
If one of the telephone numbers matches an entry
from your phonebook, the name of the caller is
displayed instead of the telephone number.
Displaying the list
1. Press the c button.
2. Select “Received calls”.
The list of received calls is displayed with the
time and date of the calls, if this information is
available in the PCM. It contains both accepted
and missed
calls.
Calling a number from the list of received
calls
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the c button.
Select “Received calls”.
Select the number or name you want.
If there is more than one telephone number
stored for a name, select the number you
want.
5. Select “Call number”.
Deleting a number from the list of received
calls
 Entries transferred from the mobile phone
cannot be deleted in the PCM. Please delete
these entries on your mobile phone.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the c button.
Select “Received calls”.
Select the number you want.
Select “Delete”.
Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting
“Yes”.
6. The number is deleted from the list.
Adding to a number from the list of received
calls
Combining DTMF tones with a telephone
number
1.
2.
3.
4.
You can use the + and w characters in the numerical input menu to combine DTMF tone dialling with
the entry of a telephone number.
Press the c button.
Select “Received calls”.
Select the number you want.
Select “Add to number”.
The input menu is opened and the number is
shown in the input field ready for editing.
5. Make the change you want.
6. Select “Call number”.
The telephone number stored in the list is not
changed.
Touch tone dialling (DTMF tones)
DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) tones can be
sent once a telephone connection has been established. You need this function to communicate with
touch tone-activated telephone systems (e.g. for
controlling your voice mailbox or when dialling in
remotely to your answering machine).
û To enter the + character, touch and
hold the 0+ symbol in the telephone input menu.
The digits of the telephone number are dialled first. As soon as the connection to
the telephone number dialled has been established, the DTMF dialling digits must be
confirmed again.
Establishing an additional call
You can establish an additional call while there is
another call active.
 Some mobile phones do not support making
or accepting a second call. In this case, the
“New call” menu item is greyed out during an
active call.
û To enter the w character, touch and
hold the * symbol in the telephone input
menu.
Touch tone dialling
1. Select “Dial number” in the call menu.
The numerical input menu is opened.
2. Enter the digits you want.
Each digit is immediately transmitted as a
DTMF tone.
The DTMF dialling digits are appended to
the digits of the telephone number without
any breaks.
The p character cannot be entered in
the telephone input menu. It is, however, recognised by the PCM if it is
stored in a telephone number on the
SIM card, for example. In this case, the
behaviour of the PCM is the same as
the behaviour for “+” described above.
The digits of the telephone number are dialled first. The PCM then waits until the
connection has been established before
dialling the DTMF dialling digits.
>>>
PHONE
63
1. Select “New call” in the call menu.
2. You then have the following options for entering the telephone number:
– “Dial number”:
The input menu for telephone numbers is
opened. Please refer to the section “Dialling
a number” on page 60.
– “Phonebook”:
You can insert a number stored in the phonebook. To find out more, please refer to the
section “Calling a phonebook entry” on
page 61.
– “Previous calls”:
You can insert a telephone number from the
list of previous calls. To find out more,
please refer to the section “Calling a number
from the list of previous calls” on page 61.
– “Received calls”:
You can insert a telephone number from the
list of received calls. To find out more,
please refer to the section “Calling a number
from the list of received calls” on page 62.
The original call is held while the new connection
is established.
You can switch between the two calls or establish
a conference call. To find out more, please refer
to the section “Call waiting (swapping) and conference” on page 65.
64
PHONE
Call waiting
Accepting a waiting call
The “Call waiting” function is only available if supported by the network provider and by the mobile
phone.
The “Call waiting” function must also be activated
in the call settings of the mobile phone. To find out
more, please refer also to the section “Call waiting
(swapping) and conference” on page 65.
û Select “Answer”.
The waiting call is accepted and activated. The
previously active call is put on hold.
You then have the option to switch between the
two calls or to establish a conference with both
callers. To find out more, please refer to the
section “Call waiting (swapping) and conference”.
Rejecting a waiting call
The PCM will not accept a third incoming call.
The caller hears a busy signal or is redirected to
the mailbox.
If you receive another call while there is already
one active, you will hear a call waiting tone.
The menu for the incoming call is displayed and a
message appears in the bottom line.
û Select “Reject”.
The waiting call is rejected. The caller hears a
busy signal.
If the caller’s telephone number is transmitted,
the number or name appears in the “Received
calls” list.
Ending a connected call
û Select “End connected call”.
The currently active call is ended and the first
call that is on hold is activated again.
Call waiting (swapping) and conference
The “Call waiting & conf.” function is only available
if supported by the network provider and by the
mobile phone.
When using the Bluetooth® hands-free unit, this
function is only available for a limited selection of
devices.
A prerequisite for this function is that there are two
calls, one of which is active and one of which is on
hold (inactive). To find out more, please refer to
the sections “Establishing an additional call” on
page 63 and “Accepting a waiting call”.
Swapping between the calls (call waiting)
Speed dialling
1. Select “Swap”.
The system swaps to the other call. The previously active call is put on hold.
2. Select “Swap” again to return to the call on
hold.
3. To end one of the two calls, select “End call 1”
or “End call 2”.
- or Select “End all” to end both calls.
Speed dialling is a frequently used function in the
US market, which allows dialling without having to
enter the complete telephone number.
Instead, you can enter the number of a memory location on the SIM card followed by the “#” character to dial the corresponding telephone number.
Conferencing the two calls
1. Select “Conference”.
Both calls are activated and connected so that
all parties can speak to each other.
2. To end one of the two calls, select “End call 1”
or “End call 2”.
- or Select “End all” to end the conference.
 The speed dialling function is only available if
supported by your mobile phone.
1. Press the c button.
The PHONE main menu appears.
2. Select “Dial number”.
The input menu for telephone numbers is
opened.
3. Select the individual digits of the memory location on the SIM card one after the other.
4. Select the “#” character.
5. Select “Call number”.
The corresponding telephone number is inserted and dialled. The call menu is displayed.
û Select “Call waiting & conf.”.
You now have a number of options:
PHONE
65
Telephone settings
(Bluetooth® mobile phone
preparation)
Setting the ringtone type
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Telephone settings”
> “Ringtone type”.
A list of the available ringtones is displayed.
4. Set the ringtone you want by selecting it.
After a ringtone is selected, it is played back
again.
5. Change the volume of the ringtone type if necessary by turning the left rotary knob t.
The volume level set in this way is saved when
you exit the menu.
 If the connected mobile phone supports the
transfer of the ringtone via Bluetooth® (inband
ringing), the Ringtone settings item is greyed
out and the ringtone must be set on the mobile phone.
66
PHONE
Setting the ringtone volume
Setting the microphone volume
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Telephone settings”
> “Ringtone volume”.
4. Make the setting you want by turning the right
rotary knob q or by selecting the two symbols
and
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Telephone settings”
> “Mic volume”.
4. Make the setting you want by turning the right
rotary knob q or by selecting the two symbols
and
 The implementation of audio transmission via
Bluetooth® often depends on the specific mobile phone implementation. If the volume in
the vehicle or for the called party is insufficient, it can be readjusted in the PCM.
Setting the call volume
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Telephone settings”
> “Call volume”.
4. Make the setting you want by turning the right
rotary knob q or by selecting the two symbols
and
Switching 3-way calling on/off
Problems may occur with 3-way calling on the
PCM as these functions are not correctly supported by all mobile phones and telephone networks
(in particular CDMA networks).
It is recommended that 3-way calling be switched
off in such cases in order to ensure reliable telephone operation.
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Telephone settings”.
4. Select “3-way calling” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
Bluetooth® settings (Bluetooth®
mobile phone preparation)
Authorised Bluetooth® devices
This function allows you to display a list of the
Bluetooth® devices currently authorised to connect with your PCM. The list contains:
– mobile phones
– MP3 players
as well as
– data devices
Displaying authorised Bluetooth® devices
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Bluetooth settings”
> “Device list”.
The list is opened.
Devices that can be connected with the PCM
using different profiles appear only once in
the list. The symbol used always corresponds to the main application. Mobile
phones that can also be used as MP3 players or data devices appear in this list with
the telephone symbol.
Connecting an authorised Bluetooth® device
with the PCM
Deleting an authorised Bluetooth® device
from the list
1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth® devices.
2. Select the device you want in the list.
3. Select “Connect”.
1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth® devices.
2. Select the device you want in the list.
3. Select “Delete”.
4. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting
“Yes”.
 Data devices cannot be connected from the
list of devices; they can only be connected by
calling the appropriate application,
for example when transferring a vCard.
Disconnecting an authorised and connected
Bluetooth® device from the PCM
1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth® devices.
2. Select the device you want in the list.
3. Select “Disconnect”.
Deleting the list of authorised Bluetooth®
devices
1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth® devices.
2. Select any device in the list.
3. Select “Delete”.
4. Select “Delete list”.
5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting
“Delete all”.
Renaming an authorised Bluetooth® device
1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth® devices.
2. Select the device you want in the list.
3. Select “Rename”.
The input menu is opened.
4. Enter the name you want and confirm by selecting “OK”.
The name of the device is now changed in the
PCM.
PHONE
67
Adding a new Bluetooth® device
For the PCM to find your Bluetooth® device,
please ensure that the Bluetooth® function on the
device has been activated and set to “visible”.
Displaying details for the authorised
Bluetooth® device
1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth® devices.
2. Select any device in the list.
3. Select “Device details”.
The following information is displayed:
– the device name,
– the Bluetooth® address,
– the connection quality as well as
– the supported services.
68
PHONE
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
> Select “Bluetooth settings”.
> “New device”.
A search is started and a list of the devices found is displayed.
3. Choose the device you want by selecting it in
the list.
A Bluetooth® code is displayed that you must
enter in the corresponding Bluetooth® device.
Once you have entered the code, successful
authorisation of the device is shown on the display.
4. The connection is automatically established by
the PCM.
 With some mobile phones, the connection request by the PCM must be explicitly confirmed
on the mobile phone. This may even have to
be done a number of times in some cases,
for example before transferring the phonebook. To avoid this request, you can authorise
the PCM in your mobile phone’s list of devices. The connection will then be established
automatically in the future, without the need
for further checks.
It can take a few seconds for the Bluetooth®
device to be authorised.
If the list of authorised Bluetooth® devices is
full (max. 5 mobile phones), you must first delete a device from the list. An appropriate
message will be displayed. To find out more,
please refer to the section “Deleting an authorised Bluetooth® device from the list” on
page 67.
Establishing a connection from an
external Bluetooth® device
If the PCM does not find your mobile phone or a
connection attempt by the PCM fails, you can also
start the authorisation from the mobile phone.
1. If another mobile phone is connected with the
PCM, switch off Bluetooth® on the connected
mobile phone to disconnect the connection
with the PCM.
2. Press the c button.
3. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
The PCM is now visible for external devices.
 Please ensure that the Bluetooth® visibility of
the PCM is activated. To find out more, please
see the following section.
4. Using the mobile phone, search for audio accessories or devices that support Bluetooth®.
Refer to the manufacturer’s operating instructions to find out how to do this.
5. Select the device “PCM” from the mobile
phone’s search results and establish a connection.
Refer to the manufacturer’s operating instructions to find out how to do this.
6. A request appears on the PCM display.
Select “Accept”.
7. A keypad appears where you enter a four-digit
Bluetooth® code of your choice and confirm
with “OK”.
8. Enter the same Bluetooth® code on your mobile phone.
Once you have entered the code, successful
authorisation of the device is shown on the display.
9. With many mobile phones, the connection with
the PCM must be explicitly established from
the mobile phone following authorisation. Further details can be found in the operating manual for your mobile phone.
Setting visibility
To ensure that your PCM can be found by other devices via the Bluetooth® interface, it must be “visible” (=recognisable) for other devices during the
search.
To prevent further unwanted connection requests,
you can deactivate visibility of the PCM after the
connection operation.
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Bluetooth settings”.
4. Select “PCM visible” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) visibility of the PCM.
 With some mobile phones, the Bluetooth®
code must be directly provided by the mobile
phone during the connection request. If this is
the case, enter a 4-digit code of your choice
on your mobile phone and confirm it with OK.
You will then be shown a keypad on the PCM
display where you must enter the same code
and confirm it.
PHONE
69
Phonebook settings
(Bluetooth® mobile phone
preparation)
Setting the memory for the phonebook
You can set which phonebook entries should be
shown in the PCM phonebook display:
– phonebook entries on the SIM card
and/or
– phonebook entries in the telephone’s memory.
This allows you to adapt the phonebook list of the
PCM to your list in the mobile phone.
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Phonebook settings”
> “Phonebook memory”.
4. Make the setting you want by selecting it.
70
PHONE
Setting sorting
You can adapt the sorting of the phonebook and
call lists to the display on your mobile phone.
You have the following options for sorting the
phonebook:
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Phonebook settings”
> “Sorting”.
– “Standard”
The phonebook is sorted by surname.
– “Alternative”
The phonebook is sorted by first name.
You have the following options for sorting the
call lists:
Setting sorting of the phonebook
– “Standard”
The call lists are sorted in the same order in
which the entries were transferred from the
mobile phone.
– “Alternative”
The order of the entries transferred from the
mobile phone is reversed. This option supports
some mobile phones that transfer the oldest
entries first.
4 Select “Call lists”.
5. Select the sorting you want.
4. Select “Phonebook”.
5. Select the sorting you want.
Setting sorting of the call lists
Setting automatic transfer of the
phonebook
If the “Auto update” function is activated, the
phonebook of a mobile phone is transferred as
soon as the PCM is connected to this mobile
phone.
As soon as the transfer is complete, the phonebook stored in the PCM is replaced by the current
phonebook from the mobile phone.
If the “Auto update” function is deactivated, the
data will no longer be updated.
6. Press the c button.
7. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
8. Select “Phonebook settings”.
9. Select “Auto update” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
Transferring the phonebook entries
manually
 Your phonebook data can then only be accessed when the corresponding mobile phone
is connected to the PCM.
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Transfer phonebook”.
4. You can now choose whether to add to the
phonebook or completely replace it.
Select the function you want.
5. Select the entries you want from your mobile
phone and transfer them to the PCM via Bluetooth.
The PCM counts the entries already transferred.
6. When transfer is complete, select “Ready”.
The transferred entries are now available to
you in the PCM phonebook.
Transferring the phonebook
This function transfers the phonebook of the connected mobile phone into the PCM again. The
phonebook stored in the PCM is replaced by the
current phonebook from the mobile phone once
transfer is complete.
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Transfer phonebook”.
Some mobile phones do not support automatic
phonebook transfer. In these cases, you can load
entries from your mobile phone’s phonebook into
the PCM phonebook manually.
Deleting the phonebook
The copy of the phonebook transferred to the
PCM can be deleted again.
Your mobile phone’s phonebook remains unchanged.
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Delete phonebook”.
PHONE
71
Operating the PCM telephone
 The use of twin SIM cards, for example in the
mobile phone and the internal PCM telephone
(both cards active at the same time), may impair the telephone functions.
For more information on this, contact your
network provider.
A SIM card is required if you want to use the internal PCM telephone in telephone mode. You can
– insert the SIM card in the slot provided under
the display or
– connect a suitable mobile phone to the PCM
via Bluetooth®.
To find out more, please refer to the sections
“Connecting an authorised Bluetooth® device with
the PCM” on page 96 and “Adding a new Bluetooth® device” on page 97.
 Please note that your mobile phone must support the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Profile or the
Bluetooth® SIM Access Profile for use with
the PCM telephone.
If there is no SIM card inserted in the slot, the PCM
automatically attempts to establish a Bluetooth®
connection with a mobile phone. However, this is
only possible if you have
Inserting the SIM card in the PCM
û Push the SIM card (SIM = Subscriber Identification Module) into the slot provided until it engages.
To remove the SIM card, press the card into
the slot again until it stops.
Insert the SIM card so that the metal contacts are
on the underside. The slanted corner of the SIM
card must be on the rear left.
72
PHONE
– activated Bluetooth® on the PCM and on the
mobile phone and
– authorised at least one mobile phone on the
PCM.
If you have not yet authorised a mobile phone on
the PCM, you can select “Find telephone” to have
the PCM search for and authorise your mobile
phone. Follow the instructions on the display.
You can find more information in the sections “Authorised Bluetooth® devices” on page 95 and
“Adding a new Bluetooth® device” on page 97.
Entering the PIN
Conducting calls
Conducting a call using the cordless handset
As soon as you have switched on the telephone
and inserted the SIM card, you are prompted to
enter the PIN (PIN = Personal Identification
Number).
You will find the PIN in the documentation you received from your network provider.
There is a hands-free microphone in the roof control console of the vehicle. This means that you
can conduct all telephone calls without using a
handset.
You control the volume using the left rotary
knob t.
1. Select “Hands-free” in the call menu to switch
to hands-free mode.
2. Press the Lift handset button on the handset to
terminate hands-free mode. The call is transferred back to the handset. To find out more,
please refer to the section “Cordless handset”
on page 101.
1. Enter the PIN by selecting the keys on the keypad shown.
The numbers entered will be shown as asterisks in the input field.
2. Confirm your entry by selecting “OK”.
 The SIM card will be blocked if you enter the
wrong PIN three times in a row. To unblock the
card, you must enter the PUK (Pin Unblocking
Key). Follow the instructions on the PCM display to do this.
The SIM card will be blocked if you enter the
wrong PUK ten times in a row. This block can
only be removed by the network provider.
You can deactivate the PIN prompt after the device is switched on. To find out more, please refer
to the sections “Switching the PIN prompt on or
off” on page 93 and “Using a stored PIN” on
page 93.
Conducting a call using a headset
1. Select “Hands-free” in the call menu to switch
to hands-free mode.
2. Select “Headset” in the call menu to terminate
hands-free mode. The call is transferred back
to the headset.
 The call can only be conducted using a headset if it has previously been connected with
the PCM via Bluetooth®.
To find out more, please refer to the sections
“Authorised Bluetooth® devices” on page 95
and “Adding a new Bluetooth® device” on
page 97.
Temporarily muting the hands-free
microphone
û Select “Mute microphone” during the call to
activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.
 The microphone can also be muted by:
– briefly pressing u the left rotary knob
- or - (with multi-function steering wheel
with telephone function)
– pressing the left roller on the multi-function
steering wheel.
PHONE
73
- or - (with multi-function steering wheel with
telephone function)
û Pressing the Lift handset button l on the
multi-function steering wheel.
- or - (with handset if available)
û Pressing the Lift handset button
handset.
on the
- or -
Accepting a call
û Removing the handset from the charging cradle.
Ending a call
As soon as a call comes in, an appropriate menu
is temporarily displayed or an appropriate message shown in the bottom line.
You can end an active call by:
If available, the telephone number and name of the
caller are displayed.
û Selecting “End call” in the call menu.
û Pressing the End call button k on the PCM.
- or -
You can accept the incoming call in a number of
ways:
- or -
- or -
- or - (with multi-function steering wheel with
telephone function)
û Pressing the Lift handset button l on the
PCM.
û Selecting “Answer” on the display.
- or -
û Selecting the menu item in the instrument cluster using the lower right stalk on the steering
wheel.
74
PHONE
û Selecting the menu item in the instrument cluster using the lower right stalk on the steering
wheel.
û Pressing the End call button k on the multifunction steering wheel.
- or - (with handset if available)
û Pressing the End call button
set.
Using the quick dial (redial) function
on the hand-
Pressing the Lift handset button l on the PCM
opens the quick dial menu. This menu contains a
list of previous calls.
- or -
û Placing the handset in the charging cradle (if
the call is on the handset).
Rejecting a call
You can reject an incoming call by:
û Pressing the End call button k on the PCM.
Dialling a number
- or -
1. Press the c button.
The PHONE main menu appears.
2. Select “Dial number”.
The input menu for telephone numbers is
opened. The input field for the telephone
number is blank.
3. Select the individual digits in the telephone
number one after the other.
4. Select “Call number”.
The telephone call is established and the call
menu is displayed.
û Selecting “Reject” in the call menu.
- or -
û Briefly pressing the left rotary knob u.
- or -
û Selecting the menu item in the instrument cluster using the lower right stalk on the steering
wheel.
- or - (with multi-function steering wheel with
telephone function)
û Pressing the End call button k on the multifunction steering wheel.
1. Press the Lift handset button l on the PCM.
2. Select the person you want to talk to.
3. Select “Call number” or press the Lift handset
button l on the PCM again.
- or Select the first list entry, “Dial number”.
The input menu for telephone numbers opens.
4. Enter the telephone number you want.
5. Select “Call number”.
Using the direct dial function
If a telephone number is displayed in a menu and
is highlighted, the number is dialled directly if you
û press the Lift handset button l on the PCM
- or -
û touch the displayed number for at least one
second.
 Always enter the telephone number with the
dialling code.
- or - (with handset if available)
û Pressing the End call button
set.
on the hand-
PHONE
75
Holding a call
Displaying the phonebook
û You can hold an active call by pressing the Lift
handset button l on the PCM.
1. Press the c button.
The PHONE main menu appears.
2. Select “Phonebook”.
The phonebook is opened.
If no entries have been stored in it yet, “List
empty” is displayed.
If entries have already been stored, these are
shown in a list.
The menu items “New call”, “Take call” and
“End call” are then available for you to select.
û To continue the call, press the Lift handset button l on the PCM again.
PCM phonebook
After you insert a SIM card, the phonebook entries
are transferred from the SIM card to the PCM.
After a Bluetooth® connection has been established between the PCM and the mobile phone, the
PCM also attempts to transfer the phonebook
data from the mobile phone. You can prevent this
automatic phonebook transfer by deactivating the
“Auto update” function. To find out more, please
refer to the section “Setting automatic transfer of
the phonebook” on page 70.
76
PHONE
Creating and storing a phonebook entry
(only with the SIM card inserted)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Calling a phonebook entry
6.
7.
1.
2.
3.
4.
8.
Press the c button.
Select “Phonebook”.
Select the phonebook entry you want.
If there is more than one number stored for this
entry, select the number you want.
5. Select “Call number”.
The number you want is dialled.
Press the c button.
Select “Phonebook”.
Select “New entry” at the end of the list.
Select “Name”.
The input menu is opened.
Enter the name you want by selecting the individual letters in the input menu and confirm
your entry by pressing “OK”.
Select “Number”.
Enter the number you want by selecting the individual digits in the input menu and confirm
your entry by pressing “OK”.
Select “Store entry”.
The entry is stored on the SIM card.
 The telephone number must be entered with a
dialling code (there are a few exceptions to
this). For overseas telephone calls you must
also specify the international dialling code.
Example: For Germany, you must enter
+4917XXX instead of 017XXX if you will be dialling the number from outside the country.
Editing a phonebook entry
(only with the SIM card inserted)
Deleting the contents of the SIM card
(only with the SIM card inserted)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press the c button.
Select “Phonebook”.
Select the phonebook entry you want.
Select “Edit”.
Select the menu item to be edited and make
the change you want in the relevant input
menu.
6. Confirm your entry by selecting “OK”.
7. Select “Store entry”.
The entry is stored on the SIM card.
Deleting a phonebook entry
(only with the SIM card inserted)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the c button.
Select “Phonebook”.
Select the phonebook entry you want.
Select “Delete”.
A prompt is displayed asking whether the entry
selected should actually be deleted.
5. Confirm the prompt by selecting “Yes”.
The phonebook entry is deleted.
Press the c button.
Select “Phonebook”.
Select any phonebook entry.
Select “Delete”.
Select “Delete SIM card”.
Confirm the prompt which then appears with
“Delete all”.
Sending a vCard
You can send phonebook entries directly as
vCards. A vCard is an “electronic visiting card” that
a recipient can accept directly into his or her
phonebook.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the c button.
Select “Phonebook”.
Select the phonebook entry you want.
Select “Send vCard”.
Select one of the two following transfer methods:
– “As SMS”
– “To Bluetooth”
6. If you choose “As SMS”, you must enter the telephone number of the recipient in the input
menu that appears.
You can also select the number from the
phonebook or call lists by selecting the corresponding menu item. To find out more, please
refer to the section “Creating and sending a
new text message” on page 85.
>>>
If you choose “To Bluetooth”, the list of known
devices that are suitable for a transfer is displayed. If the device you want is not there, you
can search for further devices. To do this,
press “New data device” (see also the section
“Adding a new Bluetooth® device” on
page 97).
As soon as the search is complete, a list containing the devices found is displayed. Once
you have selected a device in this list, a connection is established and the vCard is sent.
 You can also send a destination entry from the
personal destination memory of your navigation system as a vCard. To find out more
about this, please refer to the section “Sending a destination” on page 149.
PHONE
77
List of previous calls
When a mobile phone is connected to the PCM via
a Bluetooth® connection, the mobile phone’s call
lists are transferred and displayed after the connection has been established. The last number dialled appears at the top of the list.
 The transfer of the phonebook and call lists is
not supported by all mobile phones.
If one of the telephone numbers matches an entry
from your phonebook, the name of the person
called is displayed instead of the telephone
number.
Displaying the list
1. Press the c button.
2. Select “Previous calls”.
The list of previous calls is displayed with the
time and date of the calls, if this information is
available in the PCM.
Calling a number from the list of previous
calls
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the c button.
Select “Previous calls”.
Select the number you want.
Select “Call number”.
Sending a message to a number from the list
of previous calls
This function is only available when there is a SIM
card inserted.
 Messages can only be sent when a SIM card
is inserted or a mobile phone is connected to
the PCM using the SIM Access Profile.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the c button.
Select “Previous calls”.
Select the number you want.
Select “Store number”.
Enter the name corresponding to the number
and store the entry.
To find out more, please refer to the section
“PCM phonebook” on page 76.
 Entries transferred from the mobile phone
cannot be deleted in the PCM. Please delete
these entries on your mobile phone.
PHONE
Press the c button.
Select “Previous calls”.
Select the number you want.
Select “Delete”.
Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting
“Yes”.
The number is deleted from the list.
Storing a number from the list of previous
calls in the phonebook
Deleting a number from the list of previous
calls
78
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the c button.
Select “Previous calls”.
Select the number you want.
Select “Send message”.
The SMS input menu is opened. The number
previously chosen is already entered as the recipient.
5. Enter and send your message.
To find out more, please refer to the section
“Replying to a text message” on page 84.
Adding to a number from the list of previous
calls
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the c button.
Select “Previous calls”.
Select the number you want.
Select “Add to number”.
The input menu is opened and the number is
shown in the input field ready for editing.
5. Make the change you want.
6. Select “Call number”.
The telephone number stored in the list is not
changed.
If one of the telephone numbers matches an entry
from your phonebook, the name of the caller is
displayed instead of the telephone number.
Displaying the list
1. Press the c button.
2. Select “Received calls”.
The list of received calls is displayed with the
time and date of the calls, if this information is
available in the PCM. It contains both accepted
and missed
calls.
Storing a number from the list of received
calls in the phonebook
This function is only available when there is a SIM
card inserted.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the c button.
Select “Received calls”.
Select the number you want.
Select “Store number”.
Enter the details you want.
Please refer to the section “PCM phonebook”
on page 76.
List of received calls
Calling a number from the list of received
calls
Deleting a number from the list of received
calls
When a mobile phone is connected to the PCM via
a Bluetooth® connection, the mobile phone’s call
lists are transferred and displayed after the connection has been established. The last call received appears at the top of the list.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Entries transferred from the mobile phone cannot
be deleted in the PCM. Please delete these entries
on your mobile phone.
 The transfer of the phonebook and call lists is
not supported by all mobile phones.
 If the date and time information for the individual calls is not transferred from the mobile
phone, the list begins with the unanswered
calls. These are then followed by the accepted calls.
Press the c button.
Select “Received calls”.
Select the number or name you want.
If there is more than one telephone number
stored for a name, select the number you
want.
5. Select “Call number”.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the c button.
Select “Received calls”.
Select the number you want.
Select “Delete”.
Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting
“Yes”.
6. The number is deleted from the list.
PHONE
79
Sending a message to a number from the list
of received calls
 Messages can only be sent when a SIM card
is inserted or a mobile phone is connected to
the PCM using the SIM Access Profile.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Touch tone dialling (DTMF tones)
DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) tones can be
sent once a telephone connection has been established. You need this function to communicate with
touch tone-activated telephone systems (e.g. for
controlling your voice mailbox or when dialling in
remotely to your answering machine).
Press the c button.
Select “Received calls”.
Select the number you want.
Select “Send message”.
The SMS input menu is opened. The number
previously chosen is already entered as the recipient.
5. Enter and send your message.
To find out more, please refer to the section
“Replying to a text message” on page 84.
1. Select “Dial number” in the call menu.
The numerical input menu is opened.
2. Enter the digits you want.
Each digit is immediately transmitted as a
DTMF tone.
Adding to a number from the list of received
calls
Combining DTMF tones with a telephone
number
1.
2.
3.
4.
You can use the + and w characters in the numerical input menu to combine DTMF tone dialling with
the entry of a telephone number.
Press the c button.
Select “Received calls”.
Select the number you want.
Select “Add to number”.
The input menu is opened and the number is
shown in the input field ready for editing.
5. Make the change you want.
6. Select “Call number”.
The telephone number stored in the list is not
changed.
80
PHONE
Touch tone dialling
The DTMF dialling digits are appended to
the digits of the telephone number without
any breaks.
û To enter the + character, touch and
hold the 0+ symbol in the telephone input menu.
The digits of the telephone number are dialled first. As soon as the connection to
the telephone number dialled has been established, the DTMF dialling digits must be
confirmed again.
û To enter the w character, touch and
hold the * symbol in the telephone input
menu.
The digits of the telephone number are dialled first. The PCM then waits until the
connection has been established before
dialling the DTMF dialling digits.
>>>
The p character cannot be entered in
the telephone input menu. It is, however, recognised by the PCM if it is
stored in a telephone number on the
SIM card, for example. In this case, the
behaviour of the PCM is the same as
the behaviour for “+” described above.
Establishing an additional call
You can establish an additional call while there is
another call active.
 Some mobile phones do not support making
or accepting a second call. In this case, the
“New call” menu item is greyed out during an
active call.
1. Select “New call” in the call menu.
2. You then have the following options for entering the telephone number:
– “Dial number”:
The input menu for telephone numbers is
opened. Please refer to the section “Dialling
a number” on page 75.
– “Phonebook”:
You can insert a number stored in the phonebook. To find out more, please refer to the
section “Calling a phonebook entry” on
page 76.
– “Previous calls”:
You can insert a telephone number from the
list of previous calls. To find out more,
please refer to the section “Calling a number
from the list of previous calls” on page 78.
– “Received calls”:
You can insert a telephone number from the
list of received calls. To find out more,
please refer to the section “Storing a
number from the list of received calls in the
phonebook” on page 79.
The original call is held while the new connection
is established.
You can switch between the two calls or establish
a conference call. To find out more, please refer
to the section “Call waiting (swapping) and conference” on page 82.
Call waiting
The “Call waiting” function is only available if supported by the network provider.
The “Call waiting” function must also be activated
in the call settings for the PCM or the mobile
phone. To find out more, please refer also to the
section “Call waiting (swapping) and conference”
on page 65.
Rejecting a waiting call
If you receive another call while there is already
one active, you will hear a call waiting tone.
The menu for the incoming call is displayed and a
message appears in the bottom line.
û Select “Reject”.
The waiting call is rejected. The caller hears a
busy signal.
If the caller’s telephone number is transmitted,
the number or name appears in the “Received
calls” list.
PHONE
81
Accepting a waiting call
Swapping between the calls (call waiting)
û Select “Answer”.
The waiting call is accepted and activated. The
previously active call is put on hold.
You then have the option to switch between the
two calls or to establish a conference with both
callers. To find out more, please refer to the
section “Call waiting (swapping) and conference” on page 82.
1. Select “Swap”.
The system swaps to the other call. The previously active call is put on hold.
2. Select “Swap” again to return to the call on
hold.
3. To end one of the two calls, select “End call 1”
or “End call 2”.
- or Select “End all” to end both calls.
The PCM will not accept a third incoming call.
The caller hears a busy signal or is redirected to
the mailbox.
Ending a connected call
û Select “End connected call”.
The currently active call is ended and the first
call that is on hold is activated again.
Call waiting (swapping) and conference
Conferencing the two calls
The “Call waiting & conf.” function is only available
if supported by the network provider.
When using the Bluetooth® hands-free unit, this
function is only available for a limited selection of
devices.
A prerequisite for this function is that there are two
calls, one of which is active and one of which is on
hold (inactive). To find out more, please refer to
the sections “Establishing an additional call” on
page 63 and “Accepting a waiting call” on
page 64.
1. Select “Conference”.
Both calls are activated and connected so that
all parties can speak to each other.
2. To end one of the two calls, select “End call 1”
or “End call 2”.
- or Select “End all” to end the conference.
û Select “Call waiting & conf.”.
You now have a number of options:
82
PHONE
Using supplementary services
Making an emergency call
Supplementary services are services that can be
called up using star and hash codes.
The supplementary services can either be entered
in the number selection menu or selected in the
phonebook (provided they have been stored here).
1.
2.
3.
4.
The last digit of a supplementary service is always
the # character.
1. Press the c button.
2. Select “Dial number”.
The input menu for telephone numbers is
opened.
3. Select the individual digits and symbols of the
supplementary service one after the other.
4. Select “Send”.
The respective service is called up.
If the reply text is too long, it is truncated at the
bottom right with “...”.
5. If necessary, display the entire text by selecting “Details”.
Press the c button.
Select “i”.
Select “Emergency call”.
Select one of the two menu items in the emergency call menu that appears:
– Yes
If you select “Yes”, a connection is established to the emergency service.
– No
If you select “No”, no emergency call is
made. Instead the previous menu is opened
again.
 You can also make an emergency call:
– during an active call,
– without having to enter a PIN,
– while the SIM card is being checked as well
as
– without a valid SIM card (depending on the
country and network).
If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation
system, you can call up the current location information in the event of an emergency call.
To do this, select the “Location info” function.
Text messages (SMS)
(with PCM telephone only)
You can create and receive text messages (SMS)
with the Messages function.
1. Press the c button.
2. Select “Messages”.
The list of received text messages is opened.
Small symbols indicate the status or type of
the text messages:
unread text message,
read text message,
unread vCard,
read vCard.
vCards can be sent by other devices to the
PCM via Bluetooth® or SMS.
PHONE
83
Arrival of a text message
When a new text message arrives, a closed envelope symbol is displayed in the bottom line regardless of the menu selected.
If a flashing envelope symbol is displayed in the
bottom line, it means there is no more storage
space available on the SIM card for text messages. To be able to receive further messages, one or
more saved messages must first be deleted.
To find out more, please refer to the section “Deleting a text message” on page 87.
The arrival of a text message can also be indicated by an audible signal.
To find out more, please refer to the section
“Switching the SMS signal tone on/off” on
page 100.
Arrival of a vCard
The arrival of a vCard is indicated by a message in
the bottom line as well as by an audible signal. The
envelope symbol in the bottom line is not displayed.
Reading a text message
1. Press the c button.
2. Select “Messages”.
3. Open the relevant text message by selecting it.
84
PHONE
 If you have received a text message with your
mobile phone and cannot read it on the PCM
display, this means that the text message was
stored in your mobile phone’s memory and
not on the SIM card. The PCM does not have
access to the mobile phone memory.
In this case, please check whether the storage location for the text messages can be
changed in your mobile phone’s settings.
Please consult the operating instructions for
your mobile phone for this purpose.
Replying to a text message
The following options are available to you:
– “New text”: The input menu is opened and new
text can be entered.
– “Attach reply”: The input menu is opened and
the original text of the message is shown in the
text field. You can edit or add to the text as you
want.
– “Reply with YES”: The input menu is opened
and the original text of the message is shown
in the text field. The reply “YES” is appended to
the end of the text.
You can edit or add to the text as you want.
– “Reply with NO”: The input menu is opened and
the original text of the message is shown in the
text field. The reply “NO” is appended to the
end of the text.
You can edit or add to the text as you want.
– “Templates”: A list of the message templates is
opened and a template can be accepted or edited by selecting it.
Creating a reply with new text
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the c button.
Select “Messages”.
Select the text message you want to reply to.
Select “Reply”.
Select “New text”.
The input menu is opened.
6. Enter the text you want using the input menu.
7. Confirm your entry by selecting “OK”.
The text input menu is closed and the input
menu for the telephone number is opened. The
number of the sender of the text message is already entered in the text field.
8. Select “Send” to send the message.
Creating a text message with attached reply
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the c button.
Select “Messages”.
Select the text message you want to reply to.
Select “Reply”.
Select “Attach reply”.
The input menu is opened. The reply is appended to the text received.
6. Edit the text as you want using the input menu
and confirm by selecting “OK”.
The text input menu is closed and the input
menu for the telephone number is opened. The
number of the sender of the text message is already entered in the text field.
7. Select “Send” to send the message.
Replying to a text message with Yes or No
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the c button.
Select “Messages”.
Select the text message you want to reply to.
Select “Reply”.
Select “Reply with YES” or “Reply with NO”.
The input menu is opened.
6. Edit the text as you want using the input menu
and confirm by selecting “OK”.
The text input menu is closed and the input
menu for the telephone number is opened. The
number of the sender of the text message is already entered in the text field.
7. Select “Send” to send the message.
Replying to a text message using a text
template
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press the c button.
Select “Messages”.
Select the text message you want to reply to.
Select “Reply”.
Select “Templates”.
Select the template you want in the list that is
displayed.
7. Select “Edit template” if applicable and make
the changes you want in the text.
Otherwise, select “Use template” and add any
missing information.
8. Confirm your entry by selecting “OK”.
The text input menu is closed and the input
menu for the telephone number is opened. The
number of the sender of the text message is already entered in the text field.
9. Select “Send” to send the message.
Creating and sending a new text message
The following options are available to you for creating a text message:
– “New text”: The input menu is opened and new
text can be entered.
– “Last text”: The input menu is opened and the
text of the last message is shown in the text
field. You can edit or add to this text as you
want.
– “Templates”: A list of the message templates is
opened and a template can be accepted or edited by selecting it.
PHONE
85
Creating a text message with new text
1. Press the c button.
2. Select “Messages”.
3. Select the first list entry, “New message”, in
the list that appears.
4. Select “New text”. The input menu is opened.
5. Enter the text you want using the input menu.
6. Confirm your entry by selecting “OK”.
The text input menu is closed and the input
menu for the telephone number is opened.
7. Enter the telephone number of the recipient.
The following options are available to you:
– Enter the digits in the input menu.
– Select “Phonebook” to insert the number
from the phonebook.
Select the number you want to enter it in the
input menu.
– Select “Previous calls” to insert the number
from the list.
Select the number you want to enter it in the
input menu.
– Select “Received calls” to insert the number
from the list.
Select the number you want to enter it in the
input menu.
8. Select “Send” to send the message.
86
PHONE
Editing and sending the text of the last
message
Creating a text message using a text
template
1. Press the c button.
2. Select “Messages”.
3. Select the first list entry, “New message”, in
the list that appears.
4. Select “Last text”.
5. Edit the text displayed using the input menu
and add to it if applicable.
6. Confirm your entry by selecting “OK”.
The text input menu is closed and the input
menu for the telephone number is opened.
7. Enter the telephone number of the recipient.
The following options are available to you:
– Enter the digits in the input menu.
– Select “Phonebook” to insert the number
from the phonebook.
Select the number you want to enter it in the
input menu.
– Select “Previous calls” to insert the number
from the list.
Select the number you want to enter it in the
input menu.
– Select “Received calls” to insert the number
from the list.
Select the number you want to enter it in the
input menu.
8. Select “Send” to send the message.
1. Press the c button.
2. Select “Messages”.
3. Select the first list entry, “New message”, in
the list that appears.
4. Select “Templates”.
5. Select the template you want in the list that is
displayed.
6. Select “Edit template” if applicable and make
the changes you want in the text.
Otherwise, select “Use template” and add any
missing information.
7. Confirm your entry by selecting “OK”.
8. Enter the telephone number of the recipient.
The following options are available to you:
– Enter the digits in the input menu.
– Select “Phonebook” to insert the number
from the phonebook.
Select the number you want to enter it in the
input menu.
– Select “Previous calls” to insert the number
from the list.
Select the number you want to enter it in the
input menu.
– Select “Received calls” to insert the number
from the list.
Select the number you want to enter it in the
input menu.
9. Select “Send” to send the message.
6. Enter the telephone number of the recipient.
The following options are available to you:
– Enter the digits in the input menu.
– Select “Phonebook” to insert the number
from the phonebook.
Select the number you want to enter it in the
input menu.
– Select “Previous calls” to insert the number
from the list.
Select the number you want to enter it in the
input menu.
– Select “Received calls” to insert the number
from the list.
Select the number you want to enter it in the
input menu.
7. Select “Send” to send the message.
Forwarding a text message
Deleting a text message
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the c button.
Select “Messages”.
Select the text message you want to forward.
Select “Forward”.
The input menu is opened.
5. Edit the text message as you want and confirm
by selecting “OK”.
The text input menu is closed and the input
menu for the telephone number is opened.
Press the c button.
Select “Messages”.
Select the text message you want to delete.
Select “Delete”.
You can then choose whether to delete the selected text message only or the entire list.
Deleting the selected text message
5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting
“Yes”.
The selected text message is deleted.
Deleting all text messages
5. Select “Delete all”.
6. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting
“Delete all” again.
The text messages are deleted.
Reading a vCard
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the c button.
Select “Messages”.
Open the relevant vCard by selecting it.
Select “All details” to view all of the details in
the vCard.
PHONE
87
Accepting vCards
 If you save the vCard, the following data is accepted:
– the telephone numbers contained in the
phonebook as well as
– the addresses in the personal destination
memory in the navigation menu.
To find out more, please refer also to the
section “Personal destination memory” on
page 146.
4. Select “Accept all”.
5. Select “Accept all” again to confirm the prompt
that appears.
The details of the vCards are checked and the
valid addresses and telephone numbers are
accepted.
Editing vCard details
The addresses and telephone numbers contained
on a vCard are listed in the vCard details. The following symbols are used:
Accepting a single vCard
Details are correct and are accepted when
the vCard is saved.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the c button.
Select “Messages”.
Open the relevant vCard by selecting it.
Select “Accept”.
The details of the vCard are checked.
5. Confirm the acceptance of the valid addresses
and telephone numbers by selecting “OK”.
Accepting all vCards
1. Press the c button.
2. Select “Messages”.
3. Open the relevant vCard by selecting it.
88
PHONE
Details are correct, but are not accepted
when the vCard is saved. An appropriate
message will be displayed.
Details are not correct and can be
changed or entered again if necessary.
The procedure for editing details is described below using address data as an example.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the c button.
Select “Messages”.
Open the relevant vCard by selecting it.
Select “Addresses”.
The addresses are checked.
5. Select the address with the “?” symbol.
The address is checked again. A search for
similar addresses is performed.
If similar addresses are found, these are listed
after the check is completed.
Inserting and editing a similar address
6. Select a similar address from the list.
7. Select “Edit” if applicable and make the changes you want in the address input menu.
8. Select “Accept”.
 After selecting “Accept”, the address can no
longer be edited.
Re-entering an address
Discarding all vCards
6. Select “Re-enter address”.
The address input menu is opened.
1.
2.
3.
4.
 If no similar addresses are found during
checking, the address input menu opens automatically.
7. Enter the address you want.
8. Select “Accept”.
 After selecting “Accept”, the address can no
longer be edited.
Discarding (deleting) vCards
Discarding a single vCard
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the c button.
Select “Messages”.
Open the relevant vCard by selecting it.
Select “Discard”.
Confirm the prompt by selecting “Yes”.
The vCard is closed and deleted from the list
of received messages.
Press the c button.
Select “Messages”.
Open the relevant vCard by selecting it.
Select “Discard”
> “Discard all”.
5. Select “Discard all” again to confirm the
prompt that appears.
The vCards are closed and deleted from the
list of received messages.
Numbers in text messages
If a text message contains telephone numbers or
geographical coordinates, you can store these directly in the phonebook or list of personal destinations.
Calling telephone numbers from a text
message
1. Press the c button.
2. Select “Messages”.
3. Open the relevant text message by selecting it.
4. Select “Extract number”.
A list of the numbers contained in the text message is displayed.
5. Select the number you want in the list.
6. Select “Add to number” if applicable and enter
the necessary digits.
7. Select “Call number”.
The call is made.
Storing telephone numbers from a text
message
(only with the SIM card inserted)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the c button.
Select “Messages”.
Open the relevant text message by selecting it.
Select “Extract number”.
A list of the numbers contained in the text message is displayed.
5. Select the number you want in the list.
6. Select “Store number”.
7. Enter the details you want.
To find out more, please refer to the section
“PCM phonebook” on page 76.
PHONE
89
Using geographical coordinates for route
guidance
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the c button.
Select “Messages”.
Select “Extract number”.
Open the relevant geographical coordinate by
selecting it.
The map view is displayed and the geographical coordinate is shown. To find out more,
please refer also to the section “Map display”
on page 166.
5. Select “Start route guidance”.
The route is calculated and route guidance
starts.
Storing geographical coordinates
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the c button.
Select “Messages”.
Select “Extract number”.
Open the relevant geographical coordinate by
selecting it.
The map view is displayed and the geographical coordinate is shown. To find out more,
please refer also to the section “Map display”
on page 166.
90
PHONE
5. Select “Store position”.
The input menu is opened and the coordinate
is entered in the input field.
6. Enter the name of the geographical coordinate
and confirm your entry by selecting “OK”.
The geographical coordinate is stored in the
list of personal destinations and the map view
is displayed again.
Displaying the complete text
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the c button.
Select “Messages”.
Open the relevant text message by selecting it.
Select “Complete text”.
The contents of the text message are shown
across the entire display.
Creating a template
Included in the list of templates are some blank entries that you can edit as you want.
1. Press the c button.
2. Select “Messages”.
3. Select the first list entry, “New message”, in
the list that appears.
4. Select “Templates”.
5. Select a blank template in the list that is displayed.
6. Select “Edit template” and enter the text you
want.
7. Confirm your entry by selecting “OK”.
The template is saved with the entered contents and will be subsequently displayed in the
list.
8. Select “Use template” and add any missing information.
9. Enter the telephone number as described in
the section “Creating a text message using a
text template” on page 86.
10.Select “Send” to send the edited template.
Telephone settings
(PCM telephone)
Setting ringtones
Switching the PCM telephone on/off
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PHONE”
> “Telephone settings”
> “Sound PHONE”
> “Ringtone type”.
A list of the available ringtones is displayed.
4. Set the ringtone you want by selecting it.
The ringtone type is played after it is selected.
5. Change the volume of the ringtone type if necessary by turning the left rotary knob t.
The volume level set in this way is saved when
you exit the menu.
Switching the telephone on
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PHONE”
> “Telephone settings”
> “Switch on telephone”.
The telephone is switched on.
Switching the telephone off
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PHONE”
> “Telephone settings”
> “Switch off telephone”.
The telephone is switched off. All functions not dependent on the telephone are
still available.
Setting the ringtone type
 If the connected mobile phone supports the
transfer of the ringtone via Bluetooth® (inband
ringing), the Ringtone settings item is greyed
out and the ringtone must be set on the mobile phone.
Setting the ringtone volume
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PHONE”
> “Telephone settings”
> “Sound PHONE”
> “Ringtone volume”.
4. Make the setting you want by turning the right
rotary knob q or by selecting the two symbols
and
Selecting a network
You can set your PCM so that the network will be
automatically or manually selected.
 This function is only available with the SIM
card inserted or with a connection using the
SIM Access Profile.
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PHONE”
> “Telephone settings”
> “Network selection”.
PHONE
91
4. Select one of the two available menu items:
– Automatic
The PCM automatically selects the mobile
phone network of the SIM card that is logged
in.
If this network is not found (e.g. when
abroad), the network of a roaming partner is
automatically selected.
– Manual
If you select Manual, the PCM telephone
searches for the currently available networks, from which you can choose the mobile phone network you want to use.
 If a manually selected network is lost for more
than 10 seconds, the system switches to automatic network selection.
Displaying the IMEI
The IMEI (International Mobile Equipment Identity)
is a serial number that permits unique identification of the hardware in mobile radio equipment.
This number allows different network providers to
block the telephone in the event of misuse.
92
PHONE
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PHONE”
> “Telephone settings”
> “IMEI”.
The device number is displayed.
Switching 3-way calling on/off
Problems may occur with 3-way calling on the
PCM as these functions are not correctly supported by all mobile phones and telephone networks
(in particular CDMA networks).
It is recommended that 3-way calling be switched
off in such cases in order to ensure reliable telephone operation.
 This function is only available if your mobile
phone is connected to the PCM using the
Hands-Free Profile.
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PHONE”
> “Telephone settings”.
4. Select “3-way calling” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
SIM settings
 This function is only available with the SIM
card inserted or with a connection using the
SIM Access Profile.
Changing the PIN
This function allows you to change the PIN of your
SIM card.
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PHONE”
> “SIM settings”
> “Change PIN”.
The input menu for PIN entry is displayed.
You must start by entering the current
PIN.
4. Enter the current PIN by selecting the buttons
on the keypad shown and confirm your entry
by selecting “OK”.
You are then prompted to enter the new PIN.
5. Enter the new PIN by selecting the buttons on
the keypad shown and confirm your entry by
selecting “OK”.
You are then prompted to enter the new PIN a
second time to confirm it.
6. Enter and confirm the new PIN again.
If the two new PINs match you will see the message “PIN has been changed”.
If the two entries do not match, you will be
prompted to enter the new PIN again.
Switching the PIN prompt on or off
The “PIN prompt” function allows you to switch the
PIN prompt on and off.
If the function is activated, you will be prompted
for the PIN after you insert the SIM card. If the
function is deactivated, the PIN prompt is deactivated.
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PHONE”
> “SIM settings”.
4. Select “PIN prompt” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
5. Enter the PIN if necessary.
The PIN prompt is switched on or off if the PIN
is entered correctly.
 The PIN prompt cannot be switched off with
some SIM cards.
The PIN cannot be changed using the “Change
PIN” function while the PIN prompt is switched
off.
Using a stored PIN
If the “Last PIN” function is activated, the PIN of
the SIM card currently inserted is stored. The next
time you insert the SIM card, the stored PIN is automatically used for the prompt.
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PHONE”
> “SIM settings”.
4. Select “Last PIN” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
Call settings
(PCM telephone)
 This function is only available with the SIM
card inserted or with a connection using the
SIM Access Profile.
Activating call forwarding
Call forwarding allows you to forward (divert) calls
to another telephone number (e.g. to your answering machine).
When you first access the call forwarding system,
the status of all call diversions in the network is automatically queried. The individual call forwarding
functions cannot be selected during this time.
 Activating and deactivating call forwarding is
not supported in all networks.
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PHONE”
> “Call settings”
> “Call forwarding”.
 If an incorrect PIN entry is registered after the
SIM card is inserted, the last PIN will not be
used any further. The input menu and the
number of attempts still possible are displayed instead.
PHONE
93
4. Select one of the following settings for call forwarding:
– Divert all
activates call forwarding for all incoming
calls.
– Busy
activates call forwarding for calls that come
in while you are on another call.
To be able to activate call forwarding with the
“Busy” setting, the “Call waiting” function
must be switched off first.
– No answer
activates call forwarding for calls that you
cannot or do not want to accept. The call is
forwarded to the entered number after a certain time.
– Cannot be reached
activates call forwarding for calls that come
in while the telephone is switched off or is
not ready to receive calls.
– Cancel all
deactivates all call diversions at once. The
telephone numbers entered for the individual
call diversions remain saved in the network
and are displayed again the next time call
forwarding is activated.
94
PHONE
5. Select “Switch on”.
The input menu is opened.
6. Enter the telephone number you want for the
call diversion and confirm your entry by selecting “OK”.
- or Select “Phonebook”.
After selecting Phonebook you can select a
number from the phonebook. The call is then
diverted to this number.
7. If you set the “No answer” call diversion type,
you also need to set the delay after which the
calls are to be diverted.
Select “Delay”.
Set the delay you want by selecting it in the list
that appears.
The relevant call diversion is then activated
and the settings are shown on the display.
Checking the status of the call diversion
1. Select the type of call forwarding you want.
2. Select “Check status”.
The current status is then queried in the network and shown on the display after a few seconds.
Deactivating call forwarding
1. Select the type of call forwarding you want.
2. Select “Switch off”.
The corresponding call diversion is deactivated.
Switching the “Call waiting” function on/
off
If the “Call waiting” function is activated, an incoming call will be indicated during an active call.
The caller hears a ringing tone.
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
1. Select “SET PHONE”
> “Call settings”
> “Call waiting”.
2. Select one of the following options:
– Select “Switch on” to activate the function.
– Select “Switch off” to deactivate the function.
– Select “Check status” if the current status is
unknown and should be queried in the network.
The current status will be displayed in the information area as soon as the query is answered.
Switching the “Redial” function on/off
If the “Redial” function is activated, the telephone
automatically redials a number that could not be
reached because the line was busy.
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PHONE”
> “Call settings”.
4. Select “Redial” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
Setting transfer of your own number
If the “Send own number” function is activated,
your own telephone number will be sent to the other party.
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PHONE”
> “Call settings”
> “Send own number”.
4. Select one of the following menu items:
– “Yes” if you want to send your own number.
– “No” if you want to suppress sending of your
own number.
– “As network” if you want to adopt the network operator or provider’s setting.
 Depending on the network operator or provider, it may not be possible to switch off sending of your own number.
If you need to dial numbers with special characters (+, #, or *), you must choose the “As
network” setting.
Setting automatic call answering
If the “Auto. answer” function is activated, the
PCM automatically answers all incoming calls after
the first ring. The active audio source is muted and
the hands-free function automatically activated.
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PHONE”
> “Call settings”.
4. Select “Auto. answer” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
Bluetooth® settings
(PCM telephone)
Authorised Bluetooth® devices
This function allows you to display a list of the
Bluetooth® devices currently authorised to connect with your PCM. The list contains:
– mobile phones
– MP3 players
– headsets
– data devices
as well as
Displaying authorised Bluetooth® devices
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PHONE”
> “Bluetooth settings”
> “Device list”.
 Devices that can be connected with the PCM
using different profiles appear only once in the
list. The symbol used always corresponds to
the main application. Mobile phones that can
also be used as MP3 players or data devices
appear in this list with the telephone symbol.
PHONE
95
Connecting an authorised Bluetooth® device
with the PCM
1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth® devices.
2. Select the device you want in the list.
3. Select “Connect”.
 Data devices cannot be connected from the
list of devices; they can only be connected by
calling the appropriate application, for example when transferring a vCard.
Disconnecting an authorised and connected
Bluetooth® device from the PCM
®
1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth devices.
2. Select the device you want in the list.
3. Select “Disconnect”.
Renaming an authorised Bluetooth® device
1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth® devices.
2. Select the device you want in the list.
3. Select “Rename”.
The input menu is opened.
4. Enter the name you want and confirm by selecting “OK”.
The name of the device is now changed in the
PCM.
Deleting an authorised Bluetooth® device
from the list
1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth® devices.
2. Select the device you want in the list.
3. Select “Delete”.
4. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting
“Yes”.
Deleting the list of authorised Bluetooth®
devices
1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth® devices.
2. Select any device in the list.
3. Select “Delete”.
4. Select “Delete list”.
5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting
“Delete all”.
Setting the profile of the authorised
Bluetooth® device
With mobile phones that support both the SIM Access Profile and the Hands-Free Profile you can
switch between the two profiles.
1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth® devices.
2. Select any device in the list.
3. Select “SIM access on” or “SIM access off” depending on whether you want to activate or deactivate SIM card access.
4. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting
“Yes”.
 The switchover option is only available for mobile phones that support both profiles. This
function is not available in all other cases.
96
PHONE
Adding a new Bluetooth® device
For the PCM to find your Bluetooth® device,
please ensure that the Bluetooth® function on the
device has been activated and set to “visible”.
If you want to connect a mobile phone using the
SIM Access Profile, external SIM mode needs to
be activated on some devices.
Further details can be found in the operating manual for your mobile phone.
Displaying details for the authorised
Bluetooth® device
®
1. Open the list of authorised Bluetooth devices.
2. Select any device in the list.
3. Select “Device details”.
The following information is displayed:
– the device name,
– the Bluetooth® address,
– the connection quality as well as
– the supported services.
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PHONE”
> “Bluetooth settings”
> “New device”.
A search is started and a list of the devices found is displayed.
4. Choose the device you want by selecting it in
the list.
A Bluetooth® code is displayed that you must
enter in the corresponding Bluetooth® device.
Once you have entered the code, successful
authorisation of the device is shown on the display.
 With some mobile phones, the connection request by the PCM must be explicitly confirmed
on the mobile phone. This may even have to
be done a number of times in some cases,
for example before transferring the phonebook.
To avoid this request, you can authorise the
PCM in your mobile phone’s list of devices.
The connection will then be established automatically in the future, without the need for further checks.
Further details can be found in the operating
manual for your mobile phone.
It can take a few seconds for the Bluetooth®
device to be authorised.
If the list of authorised Bluetooth® devices is
full (max. 5 mobile phones), you must first delete a device from the list. An appropriate
message will be displayed. To find out more,
please refer to the section “Deleting an authorised Bluetooth® device from the list” on
page 96.
PHONE
97
Setting visibility
Finding the cordless handset
Phonebook settings
To ensure that your PCM can be connected to other devices via the Bluetooth® interface, it must be
“visible” (=recognisable) for other devices during
the connection operation.
To increase security, you can deactivate visibility
of the PCM after the connection operation.
To prevent further unwanted connection requests,
you can deactivate visibility of the PCM after the
connection operation.
This function starts the search for the cordless
handset.
Setting the memory for the phonebook
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PHONE”
> “Bluetooth settings”.
> Select “PCM visible” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) visibility of the PCM.
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PHONE”
> “Bluetooth settings”
> “Find handset”.
The search is started. If the handset has
been found and is not in the charging cradle, it will ring in confirmation and to help
you locate it in the vehicle.
You can set whether the phonebook entries on the
SIM card, the phonebook entries in the telephone
memory and/or the vCards stored in the PCM
should be used for the display in the phonebook.
This allows you to adapt the phonebook list of the
PCM to your list in the mobile phone.
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PHONE”
> “Phonebook settings”
> “Phonebook memory”.
4. Make the setting you want by selecting it.
 If the transfer of the phonebook data from
your mobile phone to the PCM fails, it may be
because your mobile phone is working with
security mechanisms that affect transfer using the “Phone Book Access Profile” (PBAP).
>>>
98
PHONE
These security mechanisms require the PCM
to be authorised on your mobile phone. As
part of this, the telephone requests a “user ID”
and a “password” from the PCM. In order for
the PCM to gain access to the phonebook, it
must log into the telephone.
Since the PCM uses the fixed parameters
“UserID: PCM3” and “Pass: 0000” for this
login, these parameters must be preset as
permissible on your mobile phone.
Please refer to the operating instructions for
your mobile phone to find out whether these
settings are required on your mobile phone
and how to configure them.
Setting sorting
You can adapt the sorting of the phonebook and
call lists to the display on your mobile phone.
You have the following options for sorting the
phonebook:
– “Standard”
The phonebook is sorted by surname.
– “Alternative”
The phonebook is sorted by first name.
You have the following options for sorting the
call lists:
Setting automatic transfer of the
phonebook
– “Standard”
The call lists are sorted in the same order in
which the entries were transferred from the
mobile phone.
– “Alternative”
The order of the entries transferred from the
mobile phone is reversed. This option supports
some mobile phones that transfer the oldest
entries first.
If the “Auto update” function is activated, the
phonebook and the call lists of a mobile phone are
transferred as soon as the PCM is connected to
this mobile phone.
The data stored in the PCM is replaced by the current phonebook and current call lists from the mobile phone as soon as transfer is complete.
If the “Auto update” function is deactivated, the
data will no longer be updated.
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PHONE”
> “Phonebook settings”
> “Sorting”.
Setting sorting of the phonebook
4. Select “Phonebook”.
5. Select the sorting you want.
Setting sorting of the call lists
 This function is not supported by all mobile
phones.
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PHONE”
> “Phonebook settings”.
4. Select “Auto update” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
 Your phonebook data can then only be accessed when the corresponding mobile phone
is connected to the PCM.
4 Select “Call lists”.
5. Select the sorting you want.
PHONE
99
Transferring the phonebook
This function transfers the phonebook and call
lists of the connected mobile phone into the PCM
again. The data stored in the PCM is replaced by
the current phonebook and current lists from the
mobile phone when transfer is complete.
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PHONE”
> “Phonebook settings”
> “Transfer phonebook”.
Deleting the phonebook
The copy of the phonebook transferred to the
PCM can be deleted again.
Your mobile phone’s phonebook remains unchanged.
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PHONE”
> “Phonebook settings”
> “Delete phonebook”.
100
PHONE
Settings for messages and data
(PCM telephone)
 This function is only available with the SIM
card inserted or with a connection using the
SIM Access Profile.
Changing the number of the SMS service
centre
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PHONE”
> “Messages/data”
> “SMS service centre”.
The input menu for telephone numbers is
opened. The current number is entered in
the input field.
4. Enter the telephone number you want and confirm your entry by pressing “OK”.
Switching the SMS signal tone on/off
The signal tone, which sounds when there is an incoming text message, can be switched on and off.
1. Press the c button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PHONE”
> “Messages/data”.
4. Select “SMS signal tone” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
Cordless handset
There is a cordless handset available for your
PCM.
Display
Left selection
button
Rocker button
Right selection
button
End call button
Lift handset
button
Numerical
keypad
 Using a handset while driving is not permitted
in all countries. Therefore, please observe the
country-specific laws and regulations.
Once the internal telephone is switched on, the
SIM card inserted and the PIN entered, most of the
functions of the internal telephone will also be
available on the handset. You can even enter the
PIN on either the handset or the PCM.
 In order to increase battery life, the display is
switched off after a certain time, provided the
handset is not in the charging cradle.
 If a mobile phone is connected to the PCM using the Hands-Free Profile, the handset functions are not available.
Switching the cordless handset on/off
û Press and hold the End call button for a few
seconds to switch the handset on or off.
Charging the cordless handset
û Place the handset in the charging cradle.
General operation
Once you have entered the PIN, the telephone logs
into a mobile phone network. On the display of the
cordless handset you will see the network provider’s logo, the current signal strength, the Bluetooth® symbol, the charge level of the battery and
two menu items.
You can select or open the menu items using the
selection buttons beneath them. In many cases
this brings you to a further menu.
You navigate within the individual menus using the
rocker button that can be pressed at the top, bottom, left and right edges to move the highlighting
in the respective direction.
Pressing the right selection button under the
“Back” menu item brings you to the last menu
opened or the next menu level up.
PHONE
101
Accepting a call
As soon as a call comes in, a menu is temporarily
displayed on the display of the handset.
If available, the telephone number is displayed together with the name of the caller (if an assignment to an entry stored in the phonebook is possible).
û Press the left selection button under the “Accept.” menu item.
- or -
û Press the Lift handset button on the handset.
If the handset is not in the cradle, the ringtone of
the PCM is accompanied by a further audio signal.
Ending a call
û Press the right selection button under the
“End” menu item.
- or -
û Press the End call button on the handset.
102
PHONE
Rejecting a call
û When there is a call incoming, press the right
selection button under the “Reject” menu
item.
Dialling a number
1. Enter the individual digits in the telephone
number one after the other using the keypad.
2. Press the left selection button under the “Call”
menu item.
The telephone call is established and the call
menu is displayed.
If the number dialled is busy, this will be indicated by a message on the display.
 Always enter the telephone number with the
dialling code.
You can correct an incorrectly entered
number by pressing the right selection button
under the “Delete” menu item.
Temporarily muting the handset
microphone
You can mute the handset microphone during a
phone call.
1. Press the left selection button under the “Options” menu item.
2. Select the “Microphone mute” menu item using the rocker button.
3. Press the left selection button under the “Selection” menu item to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
Establishing an additional call
You can establish a further connection with the
“New call” function. You can either:
– enter a new telephone number or
– display and call entries from the phonebook,
the list of previous calls or the list of received
calls.
Entering a new telephone number
1. Press the left selection button under the “Options” menu item.
2. Select the “New call” menu item using the
rocker button.
3. Press the left selection button under the “Selection” menu item.
4. Enter the individual digits in the telephone
number one after the other using the keypad.
5. Press the left selection button under the “Call”
menu item.
7. Press the left selection button under the “Options” menu item.
8. Select “Call” using the rocker button.
9. Press the left selection button under the “Selection” menu item.
The active call is retained if the second connection
is established.
You can switch between the two calls or hold a
conference call.
Call waiting (swapping) and conference
Calling an entry from one of the lists
1. Press the left selection button under the “Options” menu item.
2. Select the “New call” menu item using the
rocker button.
3. Press the left selection button under the “Selection” menu item.
4. Select the list you want using the rocker button.
5. Press the left selection button under the “Selection” menu item.
6. Select the list item you want using the rocker
button.
The call waiting (swapping) and conference functions are only available if supported and unlocked
by the network provider.
Call waiting (swapping)
While you are on a call, you may receive a call from
someone else.
1. Press the left selection button under the “Accept.” menu item if you would like to accept
the incoming call.
2. Press the right selection button under the
“Swap” menu item to swap between the two
calls.
PHONE
103
Phonebook
If your mobile phone is connected to the PCM using the SIM Access Profile, the data from the telephone memory and from the SIM card will be
transferred. Memory entries may contain multiple
telephone numbers for a name in this case.
Displaying the phonebook
Conference
1. Press the left selection button under the “Options” menu item as soon as you are connected with two callers.
2. Select the “Conference” menu item using the
rocker button.
3. Press the left selection button under the “Selection” menu item.
The two calls are connected and the display
shows that you are conferenced.
4. Press the right selection button under the
“End” menu item to end the two calls.
104
PHONE
û Press the right selection button under the
“Phonebook” menu item.
- or -
û Press the rocker button upwards or downwards in the main menu of the handset.
Calling a phonebook entry
1. Open the phonebook.
2. Select the phonebook entry you want using the
rocker button.
3. Press the left selection button under the “Options” menu item.
4. Select “Call” using the rocker button and
press the left selection button under the “Selection” menu item.
- or Press the Lift handset button.
 You can use the “Search” option to search for
specific entries in the phonebook. This is useful if there are many entries in your phonebook
and you don’t want to have to scroll through
the entire list.
Creating and storing a phonebook entry
(only with the SIM card inserted)
1. Open the phonebook.
2. Press the left selection button under the “Options” menu item.
3. Select “New entry” using the rocker button.
4. Press the left selection button under the “Selection” menu item.
5. Enter the name for the new phonebook entry.
The letters on the keypad are active while you are
entering the name.
This means you can enter the letters a, b and c,
for example, by pressing the digit 2 repeatedly.
The digits are reactivated while entering a telephone number.
The input mode can be switched using the “#” button.
6. Press the left selection button under the “OK”
menu item.
7. Enter the number for the new phonebook entry.
8. Press the left selection button under the “OK”
menu item.
The data is stored on the SIM card. An appropriate message is displayed if there is no more
space on the SIM card.
Editing a phonebook entry
(only with the SIM card inserted)
1. Open the phonebook.
2. Select the phonebook entry you want using the
rocker button.
3. Press the left selection button under the “Options” menu item.
4. Select “Edit entry” using the rocker button.
5. Press the left selection button under the “Selection” menu item.
6. Edit the name of the phonebook entry as you
want.
7. Press the left selection button under the “OK”
menu item.
8. Edit the telephone number of the phonebook
entry as you want.
9. Press the left selection button under the “OK”
menu item.
The phonebook entry is stored.
Text messages (SMS)
5. Press the left selection button under the “Selection” menu item.
The stored messages are listed. Small symbols (open or closed envelopes) indicate
whether or not the message has already been
read.
6. Select the message you want using the rocker
button.
7. Press the left selection button under the “Options” menu item.
8. Select the “Read” menu item using the rocker
button.
9. Press the left selection button under the “Selection” menu item.
The text message is opened.
Some menu items are not available before the
SMS list is loaded.
Replying to/forwarding a text message
Deleting a phonebook entry
1. Open the phonebook.
2. Select the phonebook entry you want using the
rocker button.
3. Press the left selection button under the “Options” menu item.
4. Select “Delete entry” using the rocker button.
5. Press the left selection button under the “Selection” menu item.
6. Press the left selection button under the “Yes”
menu item to confirm the prompt.
Reading a text message
1. Press the left selection button under the
“Menu” menu item.
2. Select the “Messages” menu item using the
rocker button.
3. Press the left selection button under the “Selection” menu item.
4. Select the “Input” menu item using the rocker
button.
1. Press the left selection button under the
“Menu” menu item.
2. Select the “Messages” menu item using the
rocker button.
3. Press the left selection button under the “Selection” menu item.
4. Select the “Input” menu item using the rocker
button.
5. Press the left selection button under the “Selection” menu item.
PHONE
105
6. Select the message you want using the rocker
button.
7. Press the left selection button under the “Options” menu item.
8. Using the rocker button, select “Reply” or
“Forward” depending on the function you want
to use.
9. Press the left selection button under the “Selection” menu item.
10.Enter the text using the letters on the keypad.
11.Press the left selection button under the “Options” menu item.
12.Select the “Send” menu item using the rocker
button.
13.Press the left selection button under the “Selection” menu item.
The telephone number of the text message
sender is displayed.
14.Press the left selection button under the “OK”
menu item.
The text message is sent.
Creating and sending a new text message
1. Press the left selection button under the
“Menu” menu item.
2. Select the “Messages” menu item using the
rocker button.
3. Press the left selection button under the “Selection” menu item.
4. Select the “Compose” menu item using the
rocker button.
5. Press the left selection button under the “Selection” menu item.
6. Enter the text using the letters on the keypad.
The letters on the keypad are active while you
are entering the name. This means you can enter the letters a, b and c, for example, by
pressing the digit 2 repeatedly.
The digits are reactivated while entering a telephone number.
Use the # button to switch the input mode between uppercase, lowercase and digits.
 If you want to insert the text from a template,
select the “Discard template” menu item,
highlight the template you want using the
rocker button and insert it by pressing the left
selection button under the “Selection” menu
item.
106
PHONE
7. Press the left selection button under the “Options” menu item.
8. Select the “Send” menu item using the rocker
button.
9. Press the left selection button under the “Selection” menu item.
10.Enter the telephone number.
11.Press the left selection button under the “OK”
menu item.
The text message is sent.
 Please proceed as follows if you want to send
the message to a telephone number from the
phonebook or from one of the two lists (“Previous calls” and “Received calls”):
12.Press the left selection button under the
“Search” menu item.
13.Select the list you want (“Phonebook”, “Previous calls” and “Received calls”) using the
rocker button.
14.Select the entry you want.
15.Press the left selection button under the “Selection” menu item.
The number is inserted in the text field.
16.Press the left selection button under the “OK”
menu item.
The text message is sent.
Deleting a text message
1. Press the left selection button under the
“Menu” menu item.
2. Select the “Messages” menu item using the
rocker button.
3. Press the left selection button under the “Selection” menu item.
4. Press the left selection button under the “Options” menu item.
5. Select the “Input” menu item using the rocker
button.
6. Press the left selection button under the “Selection” menu item.
7. Select the message you want using the rocker
button.
8. Press the left selection button under the “Options” menu item.
9. Using the rocker button, select the “Delete”
menu item if you only want to delete the selected text message.
Or:
Using the rocker button, select the “Delete
all” menu item if you want to delete all saved
text messages.
10.Press the left selection button under the “Yes”
menu item to delete the message.
Settings
1. Press the left selection button under the
“Menu” menu item.
2. Select the “Settings” menu item using the
rocker button.
3. Press the left selection button under the “Selection” menu item.
You then have the following options:
– “Language”:
Under this menu item you can set the menu
language you want for the handset.
– “Factory setting”:
Under this menu item you can reset the
handset to the factory settings.
4.
5.
6.
7.
– “Lighting”:
Under this menu item you can enter a value
for the illumination of the handset display.
– “Ring tone”:
Under this menu item you can set the volume
and profile (ascending volume) for the handset ringtone.
– “Info”:
Under this menu item you will find details of
the hardware and software used in your
handset.
Select the menu item you want.
Press the left selection button under the “Options” menu item.
Select the setting you want.
Press the left selection button under the “OK”
menu item.
PHONE
107
INFO
Displaying traffic messages (TMC)................ 109
Displaying sections of the route ................... 111
Displaying information about the location ...... 111
Displaying detailed information about the
active audio source..................................... 111
108
INFO
Displaying traffic messages (TMC)
INFO
In the d menu you will find various general information such as the current audio source, the
date and time and the signal strength for your telephone network.
You also have the option to call up more detailed
information about the traffic situation, your current
location, the individual sections in your route or
the current audio source.
Various FM radio stations transmit traffic messages in addition to their radio programme (TMC messages = Traffic Message Channel). The PCM evaluates and displays this information.
In some countries (e.g. Great Britain and France),
the TMC information transmitted can vary significantly depending on the local radio station tuned
into.
The navigation system takes these traffic messages into consideration during dynamic route calculation.
 The broadcasting stations are responsible for
the quality of the traffic messages. We therefore cannot accept any liability for the completeness and correctness of the information.
You can display the current traffic messages in a
list. If the route guidance component of your navigation system is active, the traffic messages on
your route are displayed in a separate list.
The following types of traffic messages are differentiated:
Objects on the road
Objects on a section of the current,
personal route
Accident
Accident on a section of the current,
personal route
Roadworks
Roadworks on a section of the current, personal route
Slow moving traffic or traffic jam
Austria: The location and event code was
made available by ASFINAG and BMVIT.
Slow moving traffic or traffic jam on
a section of the current, personal
route
INFO
109
Accident hazard
Accident hazard on a section of the
current, personal route
Route section blocked
Section of the current, personal
route blocked
Information
Information concerning a section of
the current, personal route
1. Press the d button.
2. Select “Traffic messages”.
If route guidance is active, the current traffic
messages on your route are listed.
3. Select “All traffic messages” if necessary.
A list containing all current traffic messages is
opened. The traffic messages on your route
are highlighted in orange in this list.
110
INFO
4. Select a traffic message from the list to call up
more detailed information on it.
You then see a map section showing the route
section in question as well as the full text of the
traffic message.
5. You can change the map scale if necessary by
selecting the two symbols
and
You can scroll through the messages by selecting the symbols
and
or by turning q
the right rotary knob.
In the case of very long traffic messages, you
can scroll to the previous or next page by selecting the symbols
and
Displaying sections of the route
If you have started the route guidance component
of your navigation system, a list containing all sections of your route will be displayed.
This function is not available during trace recording of off-road navigation.
1. Press the d button.
2. Select “Route list”.
The sections of your route are listed and displayed.
The section you are currently driving on is at
the very top of this list and the final destination
at the very bottom.
3. Select the section you want for a more detailed
view.
You then see a map section showing the route
section in question.
4. You can change the map scale if necessary by
selecting the two symbols
and
You can scroll through the various sections by
selecting the symbols
and
or by turning
the right rotary knob q.
5. If you wish to detour around this section of
your route, select “Detour”.
To find out more about setting detours, please
refer to the section “Setting a detour” on
page 153.
Displaying information about the
location
This function displays the precise data for your
current location.
If the route guidance component of your navigation system is active, the next route section is also
displayed.
1. Press the d button.
2. Select “Location info”.
The information about your current location
and its environs is displayed.
Displaying detailed information
about the active audio source
This function displays information about the audio
source currently active. The menu display is
adapted to the active audio source.
The procedure for calling up the detailed information during radio mode is described here as an example.
 If the display of the radio text has been
switched off in the m menu, it will not
be displayed here either. To find out more,
please refer to the section “Switching RDS radio text on/off” on page 25.
In TV mode with digital reception, the station,
the start/end time, the name of the current
programme, the progress bar (showing how
far along the programme is) and the genre are
displayed. Further details about the programme can also be displayed in a list. If the
text extends beyond the page, you can scroll
through the text using the symbols
and
or by turning the right rotary knob q.
The availability and amount of additional information transmitted varies from station to station. With analogue reception, only the name
of the station and the channel on which the
programme is being broadcast are displayed.
1. Press the d button.
2. Select “Details FM”.
The available information is displayed.
INFO
111
CAR
Trip data display ......................................... 113
Setting the display group .......................... 113
Setting the contents of the personal display113
Resetting trip data.................................... 114
ParkAssist.................................................. 114
Deactivating ParkAssist ............................ 115
Switching the ParkAssist display on/off ..... 115
Closing the ParkAssist display ................... 115
Rear view camera ....................................... 116
Switching the rear view camera
display on/off........................................... 116
Closing the rear view camera display ......... 117
Switching grid lines for the rear view
camera on/off.......................................... 117
Parking with the rear view camera display .. 117
Picture settings for the rear view camera ... 117
Combining ParkAssist and the rear view
camera display......................................... 118
Logbook .................................................... 119
Activating/deactivating the logbook ........... 119
Activating/deactivating the
logbook reminder ..................................... 119
Setting the standard trip for the logbook .... 119
Editing data from the current trip............... 120
Continuing recording from the last trip ....... 121
Storing a refuelling stop............................ 122
Viewing the list of stored trips ................... 122
Managing the logbook lists........................ 122
Deleting trips ........................................... 123
Transferring the logbook data ................... 124
Bluetooth® settings .................................. 124
112
CAR
The Sport display........................................127
Starting recording ....................................127
Stopping recording...................................128
Continuing recording ................................128
Ending a lap/starting a new lap .................129
Timing the interval ....................................129
Evaluating a recording ..............................129
Renaming a recording...............................130
Deleting recordings ..................................130
Deleting a lap ...........................................130
Storing a lap as the reference lap ..............131
Defining the reference lap .........................131
Resetting the defined reference lap............131
Renaming the reference lap.......................131
Deleting the reference lap .........................131
Deleting all laps........................................132
Setting the display of additional data..........132
Transferring data......................................132
Bluetooth® settings ..................................133
Extended memory.......................................135
Setting light options..................................135
Setting wiper options ................................136
Setting reversing options ..........................137
Setting comfort options ............................137
Choosing the options for setting the
air conditioning.........................................137
– Personal trip data
The trip data can be individually compiled in
four data fields.
– Sport display
Lap data can be recorded and evaluated using
the stopwatch and the PCM.
The data of relevance for the evaluation is
shown in the Sport display as soon as recording is started.
The number of displays available to you is shown
between the two arrow symbols
and
CAR
Trip data display
The CAR menu provides you with a variety of useful trip data such as the trip time, distance covered, average speed and average fuel consumption.
The following display groups are differentiated depending on the vehicle’s equipment:
– Total trip data
The trip data is totalled continuously until reset. The trip data is retained even after the vehicle has been stationary (with the ignition key
removed) for relatively long periods.
– Trip data since ...
The trip data is automatically reset after the
car has been parked for 2 hours (with the ignition key removed).
Setting the display group
û Touch the
- or -
and
symbols.
û Turn the right rotary knob q.
Setting the contents of the personal
display
You can configure the contents of the individual
data fields for the “Personal trip data” yourself.
You can choose between general information such
as date, time or outside temperature as well as
various data fields from the navigation area such
as arrival times, average speeds or consumption.
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET CAR”
> “Personal settings”.
4. Select the data field to be changed.
A list containing multiple menu items is
opened.
5. Select the menu item you want.
The chosen menu item is inserted in the corresponding data field.
 If you fill a data field with the “Distance to next
petrol station” menu item, you can start a
route calculation to this petrol station by
touching the symbol on the display.
If you select “Start route guidance”, route
guidance to this petrol station is started.
CAR
113
Resetting trip data
ParkAssist
Pressing the
button field for at least 1 second resets the trip data for the “Total trip data”
and “Trip data since ...” display groups.
ParkAssist indicates the distance between the vehicle and an object visually and acoustically for the
driver when parking and manoeuvring.
The visual parking aid of ParkAssist is shown on
the PCM display. Obstacles located in front of and
behind the vehicle are indicated using different coloured fields. These fields show the contour of obstacles as well as their distance from the vehicle.
1. Press the w button.
2. Set the display to be reset by selecting the
symbols
and
3. Select
for at least 1 second.
The trip data in the corresponding display is reset.
ParkAssist is activated automatically when the
ignition is turned on up to a speed of approx.
15 km/h (approx. 9.5 mph).
The following coloured fields are used to show obstacles and their distance from the vehicle:
 To find out more, please refer also to the corresponding chapter in the owner’s manual.
Field colour
Distance in front Distance behind
of the vehicle
the vehicle
green
< 120 cm
< 180 cm
yellow
< 80 cm
< 80 cm
Accident hazard. Even with ParkAssist, responsibility for parking and for assessing obstacles lies with the driver.
A continuous tone sounds when there is a risk
of collision.
red
< 40 cm
< 45 cm
red with
continuous < 30 cm
tone
< 35 cm
û Make sure that there are no people, animals or obstacles within the manoeuvring
area.
 If ParkAssist detects a trailer, no distance information is displayed for the rear of the vehicle.
WARNING!
û If the continuous tone sounds, do not move
the vehicle any closer to an obstacle.
114
CAR
Switching the ParkAssist display on/off
Switching the automatic display on/off
If the function is activated, the visual parking aid is
shown on the PCM under the following conditions:
– when reverse gear is engaged,
– if a roll backwards is detected,
– if the distance at the front is less than 80 cm.
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET CAR”
> “SET parking”.
4. Select “ParkAssist” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
Deactivating ParkAssist
ParkAssist can be deactivated using the A button
in the roof control console. The indicator light in
the button is lit when ParkAssist is deactivated. In
this case there is no automatic display on the
PCM. Manual activation of the display is not possible either. To find out more, please refer also to
the section “Switching the display on manually” on
page 115.
Switching the display on manually
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “ParkAssist”.
The visual parking aid is shown on the PCM display.
 When the display is active, you can switch immediately to the “SET parking” menu by pressing the i button.
Closing the ParkAssist display
The display is closed again as soon as you:
– disengage reverse gear (after 30 seconds or a
speed of > 15 km/h (approx. 9.5 mph)),
– operate the electric parking brake,
– move the Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) gear
selector into the P position,
– press one of the main menu buttons or
– press the Back button h.
 In the two last cases you can press the w
button to return to the display.
û Press the A button to deactivate or reactivate
ParkAssist.
CAR
115
 The TV sound is suppressed while the image
from the rear view camera is shown on the
display. Audio source (FM, AM, CD/DVD, AUX
and AUX BT) sound output continues uninterrupted.
There is no rear view camera display when the
parking brake is activated.
 Voice control is not available while the image
is displayed.
 Always keep the rear view camera free from
dirt, ice and snow, as these can have an adverse effect on the camera image.
WARNING!
Rear view camera
The rear view camera serves to monitor the area
behind the vehicle during parking manoeuvres.
The image from the rear view camera is shown on
the PCM display.
You have the option of displaying grid lines in the
rear view camera image. These grid lines change
according to the current position of the front
wheels. They therefore show you where the current steering wheel turn will bring you.
116
CAR
Injury hazard. The rear view camera only
serves to assist the driver. It does not replace
looking over your shoulder.
The display of objects captured by the rear
view camera is distorted.
The camera view does not cover the complete
area behind the vehicle.
û Continue to pay attention to the complete
area behind the vehicle.
Switching the rear view camera display
on/off
Switching automatic rear view camera
display on/off
If the function is activated, the rear view camera
image appears on the PCM display automatically
when reverse gear is engaged or when the rolling
back of the vehicle is detected.
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET CAR”
> “SET parking”.
4. Select “Rear view camera” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
Switching the rear view camera display on
manually
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET CAR”
> “SET parking”
> “Show RVC image”.
The image is shown on the PCM display.
Closing the rear view camera display
WARNING!
The rear view camera display is closed again as
soon as you:
– disengage reverse gear (after 30 seconds or a
speed of > 15 km/h (approx. 9.5 mph)),
– press one of the main menu buttons,
– press the Back button h,
– operate the electric parking brake or
– move the Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) gear
selector into the P position.
Switching grid lines for the rear view
camera on/off
 No grid lines are displayed in the following situations:
– manual activation of the rear view camera
display,
– driving forwards,
– open tailgate or
– trailer detected.
If your system is not calibrated or there is a
steering angle sensor error, please visit a Porsche workshop.
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET CAR”
> “SET parking”.
4. Select “RVC grid lines” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
Accident hazard. If the grid lines touch or intersect obstacles, there is a risk of collision.
û Make sure that there are no people, animals or obstacles within the manoeuvring
area.
Parking with the rear view camera display
1. Engage reverse gear.
2. Turn the steering wheel so that the grid lines
guide you into the parking space as accurately
as possible.
3. Drive backwards carefully until the edges of
the blue parking aid are parallel to the parking
space.
4. Turn the steering wheel to straighten up while
the vehicle is stationary. Drive until the end of
the lower edge of the blue parking aid is positioned at the end of the parking space.
 If the ground is uneven, the display of the grid
lines may differ from the actual lane.
Accident hazard. If the ground is uneven, the
road is slippery or the vehicle is on an incline
(e.g. curb, hill) the actual lane may differ from
the precalculated grid lines.
û Continue to pay attention to the complete
area behind the vehicle.
Picture settings for the rear view camera
Setting the Brightness
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET CAR”
> “SET parking”
> “RVC picture param.”
> “Brightness”.
CAR
117
4. Make the setting you want by selecting the two
symbols
and
or by turning the right rotary knob t.
5. If the rear view camera is automatically activated, select “Back to RVC” to cancel the picture
configuration and return to the camera image.
Setting the Contrast
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET CAR”
> “SET parking”
> “RVC picture param.”
> “Contrast”.
4. Make the setting you want by selecting the two
symbols
and
or by turning the right rotary knob t.
5. If the rear view camera is automatically activated, select “Back to RVC” to cancel the picture
configuration and return to the camera image.
118
CAR
Setting the Colour
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET CAR”
> “SET parking”
> “RVC picture param.”
> “Colour”.
4. Make the setting you want by selecting the two
symbols
and
or by turning the right rotary knob t.
5. If the rear view camera is automatically activated, select “Back to RVC” to cancel the picture
configuration and return to the camera image.
 When the display is active, you can switch immediately to the “SET parking” menu by pressing the i button.
Combining ParkAssist and the rear view
camera display
You can combine the ParkAssist and rear view
camera display. In this case you can show and
hide ParkAssist by touching the vehicle on the display.
ParkAssist is shown on either the left or right edge
of the screen depending on the steering angle.
Logbook
The logbook automatically records all the trips
made by the vehicle and stores them together with
a variety of relevant information. This includes:
– the type of use (business trip, work trip or private trip),
– the date and time,
– the start address,
– the destination address,
– the distance as well as
– the odometer reading at the start and destination locations.
Recording of a trip is started and ended automatically when the logbook is activated. It begins as
soon as the vehicle key is inserted.
When the vehicle key is removed, recording stops
and the information is stored.
If a distance of less than 100 metres (approx. 330
feet) is driven, the route is not recorded and is
added to the next trip.
 The trips are recorded even if the PCM has
been switched off with the left rotary knob.
The logbook can record and store up to 1,500
trips. The stored data can be transferred to a Bluetooth device or a USB device.
You can view and edit the logbook data on a PC using the supplied software.
 The logbook must be activated before it can
be used.
Activating/deactivating the logbook
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET CAR”
> “SET logbook”.
4. Select “Logbook active” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
Activating/deactivating the logbook
reminder
If you have activated the “Reminder” function, the
logbook menu appears for several seconds each
time the PCM starts up.
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET CAR”
> “SET logbook”.
4. Select “Reminder” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
Setting the standard trip for the logbook
The “Standard trip” function allows you to choose
the trip type to be set as standard at the start of
a journey.
The following trip types are available:
–
–
–
–
“Business trip”,
“Work trip”,
“Private trip” as well as
“Last trip”.
The “Last trip” trip type is only available if at
least one trip has been recorded.
CAR
119
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET CAR”
> “SET logbook”
> “Standard trip”.
4. Select the trip type you want.
Editing data from the current trip
You can change the different pieces of data registered by the logbook during recording of a trip as
many times as you want during the trip.
Changing the trip type
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Logbook”
> “Current trip”.
4. Select the trip type you want.
Changing the driver
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
120
CAR
3. Select “Logbook”
> “Current trip”
> “Edit trip”
> “Driver”.
A list of all the drivers created so far is
opened.
If a driver has been assigned a specific
key, this is also shown in the list.
4. Insert the driver you want by selecting him or
her.
Creating a new driver
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Logbook”
> “Current trip”
> “Edit trip”
> “Driver”
“New driver”.
The input menu is opened.
4. Enter the name of the new driver and confirm
by selecting “OK”.
 If the current trip is not a Business trip, but
rather a Work trip or Private trip, the only
fields available to you are “Driver” and “Remarks”.
Changing the trip destination
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Logbook”
> “Current trip”
> “Edit trip”
> “Trip destination”.
A list of all the destinations created so
far is opened.
4. Insert the trip destination you want by selecting it.
Creating a new trip destination
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Logbook”
> “Current trip”
> “Edit trip”
> “Trip destination”
> “New trip destination”.
The input menu is opened.
4. Enter the new trip destination you want and
confirm by selecting “OK”.
Changing the trip purpose
Changing the contact person
Changing the remarks
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Logbook”
> “Current trip”
> “Edit trip”
> “Trip purpose”.
A list of the trip purposes already created is opened.
4. Insert the trip purpose you want by selecting it.
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Logbook”
> “Current trip”
> “Edit trip”
> “Contact person”.
A list of the contact persons already
created is opened.
4. Insert the contact person you want by selecting him or her.
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Logbook”
> “Current trip”
> “Edit trip”
> “Remarks”.
The input menu is opened.
4. Enter the text you want and confirm by selecting “OK”.
Creating a new trip purpose
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Logbook”
> “Current trip”
> “Edit trip”
> “Trip purpose”
> “New trip purpose”.
The input menu is opened.
4. Enter the new trip purpose you want and confirm by selecting “OK”.
Creating a new contact person
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Logbook”
> “Current trip”
> “Edit trip”
> “Contact person”
> “New contact person”.
The input menu is opened.
4. Enter the new contact person and confirm by
selecting “OK”.
Continuing recording from the last trip
If a trip has been completed with the logbook activated, the previous trip can be continued the next
time a trip is started.
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Logbook”
> “Continue trip”.
The data from the last recorded trip is displayed.
You are then asked once more whether you
want to continue the last trip.
4. Confirm the question by selecting “Yes“.
Recording of the last trip is continued.
CAR
121
Storing a refuelling stop
If you want to store a refuelling stop in the trip currently being recorded, you can do so by selecting
“Refuelling stop”.
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Logbook”
> “Refuelling stop”.
The question “Store refuelling stop?” appears.
4. Confirm the question by selecting “Yes“.
The refuelling stop is stored.
Viewing the list of stored trips
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Logbook”
> “Trip list”.
The trip list is displayed.
If a recording is currently in progress, it is
displayed at the top of the list.
122
CAR
4. Select a trip to open a detailed view of it.
You can scroll between the detailed views for
the individual trips by selecting the symbols
and
 You can switch between scrolling in the detailed view and scrolling in the list by pressing
the right rotary knob r.
3. Select “SET CAR”
> “SET logbook”
> “Manage lists”.
4. Select the list you want.
5. Select the top list entry.
The input menu is opened.
6. Enter the name you want and confirm by
selecting “OK”.
The entry is then created in the list.
Managing the logbook lists
In addition to the lists of stored trips, lists for the
Driver, the Trip purpose, the Trip destination and
the Contact person are also created in the logbook.
Creating a new list entry
You can create a new entry by selecting the first
entry in any list (e.g. “New driver”).
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
Renaming a list entry
You can rename the individual list entries as many
times as you want.
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET CAR”
> “SET logbook”
> “Manage lists”.
4. Select the list you want.
5. Select the list entry you want.
6. Select “Rename”.
The input menu is opened.
7. Enter the name you want and confirm by
selecting “OK”.
The name is now changed.
Deleting a list entry
You can delete each individual entry in a list.
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET CAR”
> “SET logbook”
> “Manage lists”.
4. Select the list you want.
5. Select the list entry you want.
6. Select “Delete”.
7. Answer the question displayed by selecting
“Yes”.
The list entry is deleted.
Assigning the current key to a driver in the
driver list
You can assign the key currently being used to a
driver in the list.
If this key is used again when the logbook is activated, the logbook “recognises” the driver and automatically records his or her name.
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET CAR”
> “SET logbook”
> “Manage lists”.
4. Select the “Driver” list.
5. Select the driver you want.
6. Select “Assign key”.
If the key is already assigned to another driver,
you are informed of this at this point. The existing key assignment is discarded once you confirm this prompt.
7. Confirm the prompt by selecting “Yes”.
The key is assigned to the driver. The assignment is now also shown in the list.
Deleting an existing key assignment
You can delete an existing key assignment again.
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET CAR”
> “SET logbook”
> “Manage lists”.
4. Select the “Driver” list.
5. Select the driver you want.
6. Select “Delete key”.
7. Confirm the prompt by selecting “Yes”.
The assignment is deleted again.
Deleting trips
You can either delete the trips already transferred
from your logbook or all recorded trips.
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET CAR”
> “SET logbook”
> “Delete trips”.
Deleting trips already transferred
4. Select “Transferred trips”.
5. Confirm by selecting “Yes”.
All trips already transferred are deleted.
CAR
123
Deleting all trips
Transferring data via the USB interface
5. Select “All trips”.
6. Confirm by selecting “Yes”.
All trips are deleted.
 You can only access the “To USB” transmission mode if there is a USB memory stick attached to the USB interface. To find out more
about the permissible USB memory media,
please refer to the section “Notes on the media supported” on page 43.
Transferring the logbook data
Depending on how your PCM is equipped, you can
transfer stored data via either the Bluetooth® interface or the USB interface. The data is not deleted during this process.
 We recommend that you transfer and back up
the data at regular intervals.
4. Select “To USB”.
The data is transferred, provided there is a
storage medium without write protection and
with sufficient free memory connected.
Otherwise you are notified of the problem with
the data transfer by means of an error message.
 The name of the file where the transferred logbook data is stored is made up of the abbreviation “FB”, the date (YYMMDD) and the extension “.bin”.
Please note that multiple logbooks transferred on the same day will overwrite each
other without notice.
Transferring data via the Bluetooth interface
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Logbook”
> “Transfer data”.
5. Select “To Bluetooth”.
124
CAR
 Please note that the connection between both
devices must be activated for data transfer
using Bluetooth®. To find out how to activate
this connection, please refer to the section
“Switching Bluetooth® on” on page 125.
6. A list of all known devices that may be used for
a transfer of logbook data is displayed. If the
device you want is not there, you can search
for further devices. To do this, press “New device” (see also the section “Adding a new Bluetooth® device” on page 125).
As soon as the search is complete, a list containing the devices found is displayed.
7. Select the device you want in the list.
The data is transferred.
 You may first need to authorise a new device.
To find out more, please refer to the section
“Adding a new Bluetooth® device” on
page 125.
Bluetooth® settings
Calling up Bluetooth® settings
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Logbook”
> “Transfer data”
> “Bluetooth settings”.
Switching Bluetooth® on
û Select “Switch on Bluetooth” in the Bluetooth®
settings.
Switching Bluetooth® off
û Select “Switch off Bluetooth” in the Bluetooth®
settings.
Adding a new Bluetooth® device
For the PCM to find your Bluetooth® device,
please ensure that the Bluetooth® function on the
device has been activated and set to “visible”.
Bluetooth®
1. Select “New data device” in the
settings.
A search is started and a list of the devices
found is displayed.
2. Choose the device you want by selecting it in
the list.
A Bluetooth® code is displayed that you must
enter in the corresponding Bluetooth® device.
Once you have entered the code, successful
authorisation of the device is shown on the display.
Establishing a connection from an external
Bluetooth® device
Connecting an authorised Bluetooth® device
with the PCM
To find out more, please refer to the section “Establishing a connection from an external Bluetooth® device” on page 69.
 Data devices cannot be connected from the
list of devices; they can only be connected by
calling the appropriate application,
for example when transferring the logbook.
Setting visibility
To find out more, please refer to the section “Setting visibility” on page 69.
Authorised Bluetooth® devices
This function allows you to display a list of the
Bluetooth® devices currently authorised to connect with your PCM. The list contains all authorised data devices
Displaying authorised Bluetooth® devices
û Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth®
settings.
Renaming an authorised Bluetooth® device
1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth®
settings.
2. Select the device you want in the list.
3. Select “Rename”.
The input menu is opened.
4. Enter the name you want and confirm by selecting “OK”.
The name of the device is now changed in the
PCM.
Deleting an authorised Bluetooth® device
from the list
1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth®
settings.
2. Select the device you want in the list.
3. Select “Delete”.
4. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting
“Yes”.
CAR
125
Deleting the list of authorised Bluetooth®
devices
1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth®
settings.
2. Select any device in the list.
3. Select “Delete”.
4. Select “Delete list”.
5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting
“Delete all”.
Displaying details for the authorised
Bluetooth® device
1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth®
settings.
2. Select any device in the list.
3. Select “Device details”.
The following information is displayed:
– the device name,
– the Bluetooth® address as well as
– the supported services.
126
CAR
The Sport display
The functions of the Sport display can be used for
any route (e.g. journey to work), not just laps.
The Sport display is part of the Sport Chrono
Package Plus that also includes a stopwatch and
buttons for dynamic driving settings (Sport mode).
The combination of the stopwatch and the PCM allows lap data to be recorded and evaluated.
Any recorded lap/distance can be defined as a reference lap. This then forms the basis for comparing further laps/routes and recorded times. Laps/
distances whose length differs by more than 15
percent (longer or shorter) from the reference distance will be marked in the evaluation.
The time is recorded by the stopwatch operated
using the CHRONO on-board computer menu in
the instrument cluster.
Refer also to the section “Chrono” in the vehicle
operating manual.
The graphical display as well as the storage and
evaluation of the recorded lap times and the associated lap lengths is performed by the PCM.
The following information can be recorded and displayed for each driven lap:
– the route,
– the fastest lap time and in comparison the current lap time,
– a comparison of the current lap and the fastest
lap so far,
– the portion of the lap already covered and
– the distance or number of laps possible with
the remaining fuel.
Starting recording
As soon as the stopwatch in the CHRONO onboard computer menu is started, recording begins along with recording of the route, which is
shown on the display.
You can see the following in the display:
– a white line representing the reference lap,
– a destination flag marking the start of recording,
– a yellow line representing your current lap as
well as
– an orange dot representing the position of the
vehicle on the route.
CAR
127
 The route is only recorded when the display of
“Additional data” is activated in the “SET sport
display”. To find out more, please refer to the
section “Setting the display of additional data”
on page 132.
Available memory is full
If the available memory is full, a message to this
effect appears in the display. The lap details will
continue to be displayed, however the lap during
which the message appears as well as any further
laps will no longer be recorded.
A maximum of 8 hours can be recorded.
The first lap of the recording is used as a reference lap if none has already been loaded. This is
needed to display the circle diagram in the lap details as well as to display the remaining laps left in
the tank.
 A maximum of 63 laps can be stored for each
recording.
Lap information
The route is displayed when the Sport display is
called up. You can then switch between the route
and the lap details by selecting the symbols
and
or by turning the rotary knob q. This
information consists of:
– the time of the fastest lap,
– the current lap time,
– information on the remaining tank range (in remaining laps and as a distance) as well as
– the remaining memory available.
128
CAR
Stopping recording
The left half of the display shows a circle diagram.
It indicates the distance covered in relation to a
complete lap.
The circle diagram assumes different colours depending on whether the current lap is faster, as
fast as or slower than the previous fastest lap:
– green - current lap is faster,
– yellow - current lap is as fast,
– red - current lap is slower.
The number in the centre of the coloured circle indicates the current lap.
 If you have not loaded any reference laps, the
first lap recorded will be used as a reference
lap.
Neither the remaining number of laps nor the
fastest lap time is displayed while the first lap
is being recorded. The circle diagram is not
filled yet either.
Selecting “Stop” in the on-board computer menu
stops the stopwatch and therefore the recording
in progress.
The recorded data is stored.
Continuing recording
As soon as the stopwatch is restarted in the onboard computer menu with “Res.”, the Sport display appears again.
This is only possible, however, if you do not reset
the stopwatch in the on-board computer menu beforehand.
Ending a lap/starting a new lap
Reference lap
Selecting “Round” in the on-board computer menu
ends one lap and starts a new lap.
If you did not define a reference lap when recording started, the first lap is treated as the reference
lap and is shown as “Lap 1/R”.
Timing the interval
Fastest lap
Selecting “Int.” in the on-board computer menu
and then pressing the stalk forwards displays the
interval for several seconds.
Evaluating a recording
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Sport display”
> “Recordings”.
A list of the stored recordings is opened.
Reference laps are indicated in the list using
the
symbol.
4. Select the recording you want.
5. Select “Evaluation”.
The individual laps are shown side-by-side as bars
in the evaluation that appears. The height of these
bars represents the corresponding lap time. The
higher the bar, the longer the lap time.
You can scroll forward and backward in the evaluation by:
û Touching the symbols
play.
- or -
and
on the dis-
û Turning the right rotary knob q.
The laps are generally displayed in orange. The
only exception to this is the fastest lap, which is
shown in white.
Interrupted lap
If a lap is shown with a broken bar, this means that
either the driving was interrupted or the vehicle
was stationary for a time. Parking periods result
when the ignition is switched off.
Implausible (divergent) laps are shown in
grey.
Implausible laps are shown in grey. Laps are regarded as implausible if their distance deviates
more than 15% from the distance of the reference
lap.
CAR
129
Renaming a recording
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Sport display”
> “Recordings”.
A list of the stored recordings is opened.
Reference laps are indicated in the list using
the
symbol.
4. Select the recording you want.
5. Select “Rename”.
The input menu is opened.
6. Enter the name you want and confirm by selecting “OK”.
The name is now changed.
Deleting recordings
You cannot delete a recording while the “Res.”
function can be selected in the on-board computer
menu. In order to be able to delete a recording,
you must first reset the stopwatch in the on-board
computer menu.
130
CAR
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Sport display”
> “Recordings”.
A list of the stored recordings is opened.
Reference laps are indicated in the list using
the
symbol.
Deleting recordings individually
4. Select the recording you want.
5. Select “Delete”.
6. Confirm the prompt by selecting “Yes”.
The recording is deleted.
Deleting all recordings
4 Select a recording.
5. Select “Delete”.
> “Delete list”.
6. Confirm the prompt by selecting “Delete all”.
Deleting a lap
You cannot delete the last lap using the “Delete
lap” menu item while the “Res.” function can still
be selected in the on-board computer menu. In
this case, the stopwatch in the on-board computer
must be reset and the lap deleted afterwards. To
find out more, please refer to the section “Deleting
recordings” on page 130.
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Sport display”
> “Recordings”.
A list of the stored recordings is opened.
4. Select the recording you want.
5. Select “Evaluation”.
6. Select the lap you want from the evaluation.
7. Select “Delete lap”.
The lap is deleted from the recording.
Storing a lap as the reference lap
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Sport display”
> “Recordings”.
A list of the stored recordings is opened.
4. Select the recording you want.
5. Select “Evaluation”.
6. Select the lap you want from the evaluation.
7. Select “Store reference”.
The lap is stored as the reference lap.
Defining the reference lap
If no reference lap is defined in advance, the first
lap in a recording is automatically used as the reference lap.
Furthermore, any lap already recorded can be defined as the reference lap for the next recording.
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Sport display”
> “Recordings”.
A list of the stored recordings is opened.
The reference laps are indicated in the list
using the
symbol.
4. Select the reference lap you want.
5. Select “Set reference”.
The chosen reference lap is used for future recordings.
Resetting the defined reference lap
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Sport display”
> “Reset reference”.
The previously defined reference lap is reset. If no new reference lap is defined, the
first lap is used again as the reference lap
for any further recordings.
Renaming the reference lap
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Sport display”
> “Recordings”.
A list of the stored recordings is opened.
4. Select the reference lap you want.
5. Select “Rename”.
The input menu is opened.
6. Enter the name you want and confirm by selecting “OK”.
The name of the reference lap is now changed.
Deleting the reference lap
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Sport display”
> “Recordings”.
A list of the stored recordings is opened.
4. Select the reference lap you want.
5. Select “Delete”.
6. Confirm by selecting “Yes”.
The recording is now deleted.
CAR
131
Deleting all laps
This function can be used to delete all recordings
and reference laps.
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET CAR”
> Select “SET sport display”.
4. “Delete trips”.
5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting
“Delete all”.
Setting the display of additional data
1. Press the w button.
2. Select i.
3. Select “SET CAR”
> “SET sport display”.
4. Select “Additional data” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
Transferring data
 We recommend that you transfer and back up
the data at regular intervals.
1. Press the w button.
2. Select i.
132
CAR
3. Select “Sport display”
> “Transfer data”.
A list of the stored recordings is opened.
4. Select the recording you want or the “All” list
entry.
Transferring data via the USB interface
 You can only access the “To USB” transmission mode if there is a USB memory stick attached to the USB interface. To find out more
about the permissible USB memory media,
please refer to the section “Notes on the media supported” on page 43.
A directory called “SportChrono” is created on
the storage medium during data transfer.
5. Select “To USB”.
The data is transferred, provided there is a
storage medium without write protection and
with sufficient free memory connected.
Otherwise you are notified of the problem with
the data transfer by means of an error message.
Transferring data via the Bluetooth®
interface
 Please note that the connection between both
devices must be activated for data transfer
using Bluetooth®. To find out how to activate
this connection, please refer to the section
“Switching Bluetooth® on” on page 133.
5. Select “To Bluetooth”.
6. A list of all known devices that may be used for
a transfer of data is displayed. If the device you
want is not there, you can search for further
devices. To do this, press “New device” (see
also the section “Adding a new Bluetooth® device” on page 133).
As soon as the search is complete, a list containing the devices found is displayed.
7. Select the device you want.
 You may first need to authorise a new device.
To find out more, please refer to the section
“Adding a new Bluetooth® device” on
page 133.
Bluetooth® settings
Calling up Bluetooth® settings
1. Press the w button.
2. Select i.
3. Select “Sport display”
> “Transfer data”
> “Bluetooth settings”.
Switching Bluetooth® on
û Select “Switch on Bluetooth” in the Bluetooth®
settings.
Switching Bluetooth® off
û Select “Switch off Bluetooth” in the Bluetooth®
settings.
Adding a new Bluetooth
®
device
For the PCM to find your Bluetooth® device,
please ensure that the Bluetooth® function on the
device has been activated and set to “visible”.
1. Select “New data device” in the Bluetooth®
settings.
A search is started and a list of the devices
found is displayed.
2. Choose the device you want by selecting it in
the list.
A Bluetooth® code is displayed that you must
enter in the corresponding Bluetooth® device.
Once you have entered the code, successful
authorisation of the device is shown on the display.
Authorised Bluetooth® devices
Establishing a connection from an external
Bluetooth® device
Connecting an authorised Bluetooth® device
with the PCM
To find out more, please refer to the section “Establishing a connection from an external Bluetooth® device” on page 69.
 Data devices cannot be connected from the
list of devices; they can only be connected by
calling the appropriate application,
for example when transferring the data from
the Sport display.
Setting visibility
To find out more, please refer to the section “Setting visibility” on page 69.
This function allows you to display a list of the
Bluetooth® devices currently authorised to connect with your PCM. The list contains all authorised data devices
Displaying authorised Bluetooth® devices
û Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth®
settings.
Renaming an authorised Bluetooth® device
1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth®
settings.
2. Select the device you want in the list.
CAR
133
3. Select “Rename”.
The input menu is opened.
4. Enter the name you want and confirm by selecting “OK”.
The name of the device is now changed in the
PCM.
Deleting an authorised Bluetooth® device
from the list
1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth®
settings.
2. Select the device you want in the list.
3. Select “Delete”.
4. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting
“Yes”.
Deleting the list of authorised Bluetooth®
devices
1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth®
settings.
2. Select any device in the list.
3. Select “Delete”.
4. Select “Delete list”.
5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting
“Delete all”.
134
CAR
Displaying details for the authorised
Bluetooth® device
1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth®
settings.
2. Select any device in the list.
3. Select “Device details”.
The following information is displayed:
– the device name,
– the Bluetooth® address as well as
– the supported services.
Extended memory
Setting light options
In the PCM menu you have the option to store various settings for up to three of your vehicle’s ignition keys and two of your vehicle’s memory buttons. Both driver-related settings from the instrument cluster as well as PCM settings are stored in
this process.
Setting the daytime running lights
The following PCM settings are stored:
– the personal data fields of the trip data in the
w main menu,
– the stations stored on the station buttons of
the various preset memories in radio mode,
– the sound settings for the various audio sources,
– the volume settings for the various audio
sources,
– settings for the map view as well as
– the settings for voice control.
The vehicle-dependent settings are described in
the following sections.
If the “Daytime Run. Lights” function is active ( ),
the lights will always be switched on when the engine is running. This applies regardless of the light
switch setting.
The illumination of the instruments and switches is
still switched on and off via the light switch, regardless of the “Daytime Run. Lights” setting.
This function is only available in countries where
daytime running lights are not mandatory.
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET CAR”
> “Vehicle functions”
> “Light & visibility”
> “Exterior lights”.
4. Select “Daytime Run. Lights” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
Setting the fade-out time for the exterior
lights of the vehicle
You can set a fade-out time of between 10 and
120 seconds for your vehicle’s exterior lights.
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET CAR”
> “Vehicle functions”
> “Light & visibility”
> “Exterior lights”
> “Fade-out time”.
4. Set the time period you want by touching the
two symbols
and
or by turning the right
rotary knob t.
The setting is immediately applied.
The “Fade-out time” setting also changes the illumination duration when unlocking the vehicle.
To find out more about this, please refer to the
chapter “Welcome home function” in the owner’s
manual.
To find out more about the extended memory,
please refer also to the corresponding chapter in
the owner’s manual.
 The range of vehicle settings available in the
PCM depends on the vehicle type and the
equipment installed.
CAR
135
Setting the alignment for the low beam
You can set the alignment of the low beam headlights for driving on the right or left.
You can only change this function when the vehicle
is stationary.
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET CAR”
> “Vehicle functions”
> “Light & visibility”
> “Exterior lights”
> “Low beams”.
4. Select “Standard” to adapt the headlights to
the normal direction of traffic in the delivery
country.
- or 4 Select “Inverted” to adapt the headlights to the
other direction of traffic.
Setting the orientation light
The orientation lighting include the lights in the
area of the roof console, the inner door handles
and the storage compartments.
You can set the intensity of the orientation light on
a scale from 0 to 10.
136
CAR
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET CAR”
> “Vehicle functions”
> “Light & visibility”
> “Interior lights”
> “Orientation light”.
4. Set the intensity you want by touching the two
symbols
and
or by turning the right rotary knob t.
The setting is immediately applied.
Setting the fade-out time for the interior
lights of the vehicle
You can set a fade-out time of between 0 and
300 seconds for your vehicle’s interior lights.
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET CAR”
> “Vehicle functions”
> “Light & visibility”
> “Interior lights”
> “Fade-out time”.
4. Set the time period you want by touching the
two symbols
and
or by turning the right
rotary knob t.
The setting is immediately applied.
Setting wiper options
You can choose whether you want to switch on
your vehicle’s windscreen wipers yourself or
whether they should be controlled automatically.
Setting activation of the rain sensor
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET CAR”
> “Vehicle functions”
> “Light & visibility”
> “Wiper”
> “Rain sensor”.
4. Select “Automatic” if the rain sensor is to be
permanently active as soon as the wiper
switch is set to intermittent mode.
- or 4 Select “Manual” if the rain sensor is to be
started manually.
Setting activation of the rear wiper
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET CAR”
> “Vehicle functions”
> “Light & visibility”
> “Wiper”
> “Rear wiper”.
4. Select “Automatic” if the rear wiper is to be
switched on automatically. This happens as
soon as reverse gear is engaged and the front
wiper has been active during the previous 40
seconds.
- or 4 Select “Manual” if the rear wiper is to be started manually.
Setting reversing options
Setting lowering of the right exterior mirror
You can set whether the right exterior mirror is to
be lowered automatically and the direction indicator is to be operated when reverse gear is engaged.
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET CAR”
> “Vehicle functions”
> “Light & visibility”
> “Reversing options”.
4. Select “Lower mirror” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
Setting opening of the rear blind
You can set whether the rear blind is to be opened
automatically when reverse gear is engaged.
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET CAR”
> “Vehicle functions”
> “Light & visibility”
> “Reversing options”.
4. Select “Open rear blind” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
Setting comfort options
Setting automatic folding in the exterior
mirrors
You can set whether the exterior mirrors are to be
folded in automatically when the vehicle is
switched off.
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET CAR”
> “Vehicle functions”
> “Locking system”.
4. Select “Fold in mirror” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
Activating the entry aid
If this function is activated, the steering wheel and
driver’s seat are retracted automatically to make
it easier to get in and out of the vehicle.
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET CAR”
> “Vehicle functions”
> “Locking system”.
4. Select “Entry aid” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
CAR
137
Choosing the options for setting the air
conditioning
Setting the air flow strength
You can choose whether the air flow for the air
conditioning is to be set to “Gentle”, “Normal” or
“Strong”.
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET CAR”
> “Vehicle functions”
> “Air conditioning”
> “Air flow”.
4. Select the setting you want.
Setting use of the upper ventilation zone
If this function is activated, the upper ventilation
zone is also taken into account for the automatic
air conditioning system.
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET CAR”
> “Vehicle functions”
> “Air conditioning”.
4. Select “Ventilation zone” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
138
CAR
Setting adaptation of the central vents
If this function is activated, the output temperature
at both central vents in the dashboard is adapted.
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET CAR”
> “Vehicle functions”
> “Air conditioning”.
4. Select “Center cooler” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
Setting automatic air circulation
If this function is activated, the fresh air supply is
shut off and the air circulation function is activated
if the air quality is poor.
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET CAR”
> “Vehicle functions”
> “Air conditioning”.
4. Select “Auto recir. air” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
NAVI
General operation ....................................... 140
Navigation safety notice............................ 141
Setting the volume of the
navigation announcement.......................... 141
Repeating a navigation announcement ....... 141
Entering an address.................................... 141
Entering the country ................................. 142
Entering the town/postal code................... 142
Entering the street/number ....................... 142
Entering the junction ................................. 143
Starting/stopping route guidance................. 143
Starting route guidance ............................ 143
Stopping route guidance ........................... 143
Activating alternative routes for
route guidance......................................... 143
Starting route guidance with route
alternatives activated................................ 143
Displaying information for traffic
messages on the route ............................. 143
List of previous destinations ........................ 144
Entering an address for a new route
guidance session from the list ................... 145
Displaying the location of a destination....... 145
Editing the address of a destination ........... 145
Deleting................................................... 145
Storing a destination in the personal
destination memory .................................. 145
Calling the destination............................... 146
Personal destination memory....................... 146
Storing an address for
personal destinations................................ 146
Entering an address for route guidance
from the list .............................................147
Displaying the location of a destination.......147
Editing the address of a destination ...........147
Adding destinations ..................................147
Entering/editing a telephone number for
a destination in the destination memory .....148
Editing the destination name......................148
Calling the destination...............................148
Deleting a destination ...............................148
Bluetooth® settings ..................................149
Points of interest ........................................151
Searching for points of interest
by category .............................................151
Searching for points of interest by name ....152
Searching for points of interest by
telephone number ....................................152
Searching for points of interest in
the map view ...........................................152
Starting navigation to the point of interest ..153
Changing options for route guidance ............153
Setting a detour .......................................153
Cancelling a detour...................................154
Setting a fast/quick route .........................154
Setting dynamic route planning (TMC) ........154
Avoiding a stretch of road .........................155
Stopovers (tour)..........................................155
Entering stopovers ..................................155
Via destinations ........................................156
Deleting stopovers ...................................157
Storing stopovers in the personal
destination memory ..................................157
Reorganising the stopovers.......................157
Destination input using geographical
coordinates ................................................158
Destination input using the map....................158
Storing.......................................................158
Storing a destination.................................158
Storing a position .....................................159
Off-road navigation ......................................159
Activating/deactivating off-road navigation..160
Safety notice for off-road navigation...........160
Landmark navigation.................................160
Recording a trip section (trace)..................161
Tracing a route.........................................163
Reloading data............................................164
Changing the navigation database..............164
NAVI
139
NAVI
General operation
The PCM navigation system utilises visual and audible driving recommendations to help you reach
your destination.
The vehicle’s position is determined with the aid of
a GPS antenna and a receiver in the navigation
module.
The vehicle position is calculated by evaluating
and processing additional vehicle signals
(e.g. speed) in the navigation computer. This enables the system to automatically correct signal
changes due to wheel changes (altered tyre diameter), temperature or air pressure variations.
The PCM features a hard drive where the digital
map data is stored.
If an area on this hard drive is damaged or corrupt,
the PCM can no longer access the data on it.
A message to this effect will be displayed.
 During an active telephone call, the driving
recommendations are suppressed.
140
NAVI
WARNING!
Accident hazard. The navigation system is
only intended as an aid to the driver and makes
recommendations on the routes to take. This
does not release you from full responsibility for
observing road safety, traffic conditions, legal
road traffic regulations and any other relevant
regulations while driving your vehicle.
As the driver, you must assess the traffic situation. You have sole responsibility for road
safety while driving your car.
û Continue to pay attention to the traffic situation.
To ensure you make the most effective use of your
PCM navigation system, please observe the following points:
– GPS reception can be impaired under trees or
between high buildings. No GPS reception is
possible in multi-storey car parks, tunnels
and the like.
– The GPS antenna must not be covered by metallic or damp objects.
– After the vehicle’s on-board voltage has been
interrupted (e.g. for changing the vehicle battery), it can take up to 15 minutes or more depending on the reception conditions for the
GPS to re-initialise.
– After transporting the vehicle, for example by
ferry, it can take several minutes depending on
the reception conditions after switching on until the current GPS position is established.
– Without GPS reception, the system calculates
the current position using the vehicle signals
and therefore remains operational in situations
where the reception is temporarily poor.
– High wheel slip (spin on snow) can result in an
incorrect position being given for a short time.
– After initial start-up of the navigation system,
the fine calibration requires approx. 50 km
(30 miles).
– After a tyre change (e.g. summer/winter
tyres), fine calibration will only be reached after
up to 50 km (30 miles).
– During fine calibration, full location accuracy is
not yet reached.
Setting the volume of the navigation
announcement
1. Press the f button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET NAVI”
> “Guidance volume”.
4. Make the setting you want by selecting the two
symbols
and
Navigation safety notice
Repeating a navigation announcement
You are shown a message that the navigation system is only intended as an aid to the driver as
soon as you:
û After you have listened to the navigation announcement, press the g button twice in
succession.
– have switched on the PCM and activated route
guidance
or
The navigation announcement is repeated.
– have switched on the PCM and pressed the
f button or g button for the first
time.
 While the navigation announcement is being
repeated, you can adjust the volume of the
navigation announcement by turning the left
rotary knob t.
The changed volume is set and stored.
Entering an address
After you select “Enter address”, the address of
the last destination is displayed in the information
area.
If route guidance is active, the address of the current destination is displayed.
 Observe the following points for destination input:
– Destination input is only possible using the
data available on the hard drive of the device.
There may be restrictions regarding street
names, street numbers, city centres and
points of interest. This applies particularly if
the destination is located in a partly digitised area (map data for this area is inaccurate or incomplete).
– We are constantly working to collect further
data and update available data. Information
regarding new or updated software is available from your Porsche partner.
û Close the safety notice by selecting “Confirm”.
NAVI
141
Selecting a country in the map
Entering the country
After you first select address entry, only the
“Country” menu item can be selected. You must
enter a country before you can enter the remaining address data.
Selecting a country in the list
1. Press the f button.
2. Select “Enter address”
> “Country”.
A list of the countries for which navigation
data is stored on the hard drive is opened.
3. Select the country you want in the list.
142
NAVI
1. Press the f button.
2. Select “Enter address”
> “Country”.
A list of the countries for which navigation
data is stored on the hard drive is opened.
> Select “Country via map”.
A map of Europe is opened.
3. Touch the upper or lower map section depending on the country you want to choose.
An enlarged map section containing the relevant country abbreviations is displayed.
4. Select the country you want in the map.
Entering the town/postal code
You can enter the town either by means of its
name or its postal code.
1. Press the f button.
2. Select “Enter address”
> “Town/postal code”.
The input menu is opened.
3. Enter the town name or the postal code.
After you enter the first letters of the town and
confirm by selecting “OK”, a list containing
possible matches is opened.
4. Select the town you want in the list.
- or 4. Highlight a town in the list and select “Details”
in the header.
A map section containing the previously highlighted town is opened. If there are several
towns with this name, you can switch between
the different map views by touching the symbols
and
on the display.
5. Select “OK” to use the town displayed in the
map section for route guidance.
Entering the street/number
1. Press the f button.
2. Select “Enter address”
> “Street/no.”.
The input menu is opened.
3. Enter the street name.
After you enter the first letters of the street
name, a list containing possible matches is
opened.
4. Select the street you want in the list.
 You can also enter the street number later
(when route guidance is already active). If you
do so, however, you must then restart route
guidance.
Entering the junction
1. Press the f button.
2. Select “Enter address”
> “Junction”.
The input menu is opened.
3. Enter the name of the cross street.
After you enter the first letters of the street
name, a list containing possible matches is
opened.
4. Select the street you want in the list.
Starting/stopping route guidance
Starting route guidance
To be able to start route guidance, you must have
entered at least a country and a town.
û After entering the address data, select “Start
route guidance” to start route guidance.
Stopping route guidance
û Select “Stop route guidance” in the main menu
during an active route guidance session to
stop route guidance.
Activating alternative routes for route
guidance
1. Press the f button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET NAVI”.
4. Select “Route alternatives” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
Starting route guidance with route
alternatives activated
If you have activated the route alternatives in the
settings menu, the “Start route guidance” menu
item is replaced with the “Calculate routes” menu
item.
1. Enter an address.
2. Select “Calculate routes”.
The route alternatives are calculated. Any stopovers and via destinations that you have entered are also taken into account in the calculation.
The possible alternative routes are displayed.
3. Choose the route you want for the calculation
by selecting it.
4. Select “Start route guidance” to start the route
guidance.
Displaying information for traffic
messages on the route
If the “Detour prompt” function is activated, information is displayed for each traffic message
– that is on the current route
NAVI
143
and
– that is at least 10 minutes before the last possible exit before the traffic jam.
 “Detour prompt” can only be activated if dynamic route planning is deactivated.
1. Press the f button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET NAVI”.
4. Select “Detour prompt” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
A prompt must be confirmed as soon as it is displayed. The following options are available to you:
û Select “Detour”.
A new route is calculated taking the relevant
traffic message into account.
û Select “Ignore”.
The original route guidance session is resumed. The traffic message is not taken into
account.
144
NAVI
û Select “Details”.
The detailed view of the traffic message is displayed.
> Select “Detour” to close the detailed view
and calculate a new route.
- or > Press the Back button h to close the
detailed view again and ignore the traffic
message.
 You can also close the message or detailed
view at any time by pressing any button.
List of previous destinations
This list automatically stores the previous 100
destinations for which you started route guidance.
Points of interest are indicated by symbols.
Point of interest
To find out more, please refer to the
section “Points of interest” on
page 151.
Geographical coordinate
To find out more, please refer to the
section “Destination input using geographical coordinates” on
page 158.
Point positioning
To find out more, please refer to the
section “Inserting a destination from
the map (point positioning)” on
page 156.
You can call up, edit and store the destinations for
a new route guidance session.
4. Select “Details”.
The location of the chosen destination is
shown in the map view. To find out more,
please refer to the section “Map display” on
page 166.
5. Select “Start route guidance” to start the route
guidance if needed.
Editing the address of a destination
Entering an address for a new route
guidance session from the list
1. Press the f button.
2. Select “Previous destinations”.
The list of previous destinations is opened.
3. Select the destination you want.
4. Select “Start route guidance” to start the route
guidance.
Displaying the location of a destination
1. Press the f button.
2. Select “Previous destinations”.
The list of previous destinations is opened.
3. Select the destination you want.
1. Press the f button.
2. Select “Previous destinations”.
The list of previous destinations is opened.
3. Select the destination you want.
4. Select “Edit”
> “Address”.
The address entry menu is opened.
5. Make the changes you want.
Deleting
1. Press the f button.
2. Select “Previous destinations”.
The list of previous destinations is opened.
3. Select the destination you want.
4. Select “Edit”
> “Delete”.
Deleting a destination from the list
5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting
“Yes”.
The chosen destination is deleted from the list.
Deleting the entire list
5. Select “Delete list”
> “Delete all”.
The entire list is deleted.
Storing a destination in the personal
destination memory
Storing of destinations in the list of previous destinations takes place automatically. If all the memory locations are full, the PCM automatically deletes
the oldest entry from the list.
If you want to keep a destination permanently
available, you can store it in your personal destination memory under a name of your choice.
1. Press the f button.
2. Select “Previous destinations”.
The list of previous destinations is opened.
3. Select the destination you want.
4. Select “Store”.
The input menu is opened.
5. Enter the destination name you want and confirm by selecting “OK”.
The destination is stored in the personal destination memory.
NAVI
145
Calling the destination
You can call individual points of interest for which
there is a telephone number in the database from
the list of previous destinations. This menu item is
not available if there is no telephone number
stored in the database for a destination or if the
telephone function is not available. “Store position” is displayed instead.
1. Press the f button.
2. Select “Previous destinations”.
The list of previous destinations is opened.
3. Select the destination you want.
4. Select “Call”.
The number stored in the database is dialled.
Personal destination memory
In your personal destination memory you can
store 100 destination entries as well as 15 offroad navigation routes (traces) under freely defined names. The personal destination memory
also contains the two personal destinations “GO
HOME” and “GO TO OFFICE” that can be assigned
the corresponding addresses and are always displayed at the top of the list.
146
NAVI
Points of interest are indicated by symbols.
POI
To find out more, please refer to the
section “Points of interest” on
page 151.
Geo. co-ordinates
To find out more, please refer to the
section “Destination input using geographical coordinates” on
page 158.
Point positioning
To find out more, please refer to the
section “Inserting a destination from
the map (point positioning)” on
page 156.
Stopovers (tour)
To find out more, please refer to the
section “Stopovers (tour)” on
page 155.
Trace
To find out more, please refer to the
section “Off-road navigation” on
page 159.
Landmark list
To find out more, please refer to the
section “Off-road navigation” on
page 159.
Storing an address for personal
destinations
Here is an example of how to enter the address for
the personal destination “GO HOME”:
1. Press the f button.
2. Select “Stored destinations”.
The personal destination memory is opened.
3. Select “GO HOME”.
4. Confirm the prompt that appears with “Yes”.
Storing an address by entering it
5. Select “Enter address”.
6. If applicable, select “Country” and select the
country you want in the list.
7. Select the “Town/postal code” and “Street/no.”
menu items one after the other and enter the
appropriate details in the input menu.
8. Select “Store” to store the entered address for
the entry.
Inserting an address from a list
Displaying the location of a destination
Adding destinations
5. Select “Previous destinations“ or “Stored destinations”.
6. Select the address you want in the list.
The address is accepted.
1. Press the f button.
2. Select “Stored destinations”.
The personal destination memory is opened.
3. Select the destination you want.
4. Select “Details”.
The location of the chosen destination is
shown in the map view. To find out more,
please refer to the section “Map display” on
page 166.
5. Select “Start route guidance” to start the route
guidance if needed.
 Traces cannot be added with this menu item.
 It is not possible to store a tour, a trace or a
landmark list as a personal destination.
Adding an address from a POI search
5. Select “POI”.
For the rest of the procedure, please refer to
the section “Points of interest” on page 151.
Entering an address for route guidance
from the list
1. Press the f button.
2. Select “Stored destinations”.
The personal destination memory is opened.
3. Select the destination you want.
4. Select “Start route guidance” to start the route
guidance.
Editing the address of a destination
1. Press the f button.
2. Select “Stored destinations”.
The personal destination memory is opened.
3. Select the destination you want.
4. Select “Edit”
> “Address”.
The address entry menu is opened.
5. Make the changes you want.
6. Select “Accept”.
7. The old data is overwritten.
1. Press the f button.
2. Select “Stored destinations”.
The personal destination memory is opened.
3. Select “Add destinations”.
Adding addresses by address entry
4. Select “Enter address”.
5. If applicable, select “Country” and select the
country you want in the list.
6. Select the “Town/postal code” and “Street/no.”
menu items one after the other and enter the
appropriate details in the input menu.
7. Select “Store” to store the entered address for
the entry.
Adding destinations by loading from a USB
4. Select “Load from USB”.
The data is transferred.
 You can only access the “Load from USB”
transmission mode if there is a USB memory
stick attached to the USB interface. To find
out more about the permissible USB memory
media, please refer to the section “Notes on
the media supported” on page 43.
NAVI
147
Entering/editing a telephone number for a
destination in the destination memory
In the personal destination memory you can create a telephone number for each destination for
standard navigation.
You cannot enter or edit a telephone number if the
destination you want is a trace or a point of interest (destinations for off-road navigation).
1. Press the f button.
2. Select “Stored destinations”.
The personal destination memory is opened.
3. Select the destination you want.
4. Select “Edit”
> “Telephone number”.
The input menu for telephone numbers is
opened.
5. Enter the number you want and confirm by selecting “OK”.
Editing the destination name
 The two personal destinations “GO HOME“
and “GO TO OFFICE” cannot be renamed.
1. Press the f button.
2. Select “Stored destinations”.
The personal destination memory is opened.
148
NAVI
3. Select the destination you want.
4. Select “Edit”
> “Destination name”.
The input menu is opened.
5. Make the change you want and confirm by
selecting “OK”.
Calling the destination
You can store a telephone number for destinations
held in the personal destination memory. This
menu item is not available if the telephone function
is not available or if you have not stored a telephone number for the destination.
1. Press the f button.
2. Select “Stored destinations”.
The personal destination memory is opened.
3. Select the destination you want.
4. Select “Call”.
The number stored in the database is dialled.
 Telephone numbers are also stored for the
points of interest held on the hard drive. If, for
example, you select a point of interest in the
map view, you can establish a telephone connection by selecting “Call” in the detailed view
of the map view.
To find out more, please refer also to the section “Searching for points of interest in the
map view” on page 152.
Deleting a destination
1. Press the f button.
2. Select “Stored destinations”.
The personal destination memory is opened.
3. Select the destination you want.
4. Select “Edit”
> “Delete”.
Deleting a destination from the list
5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting
“Yes”.
The chosen destination is deleted from the list.
Deleting the entire list
5. Select “Delete list”
> “Delete all”.
The entire personal destination memory is
deleted. Deletion also affects the two personal destinations “GO HOME“ and “GO TO
OFFICE”.
Sending a destination
You can send individual destinations from the personal destination memory as a text message in
the form of a vCard or via the Bluetooth® interface.
1. Press the f button.
2. Select “Stored destinations”.
The personal destination memory is opened.
3. Select the destination you want.
4. Select “Edit”
> “Send”.
Sending a destination via USB
 You can only access the “To USB” transmission mode if there is a USB memory stick attached to the USB interface. To find out more
about the permissible USB memory media,
please refer to the section “Notes on the media supported” on page 43.
5. Select “To USB”.
The data is transferred.
Sending a destination via the Bluetooth
interface
 Please note that the radio connection between both devices must be activated for
data transfer using Bluetooth®. To find out
how to activate this radio connection, please
refer to the section “Switching Bluetooth® on”
on page 149.
5. Select “To Bluetooth”.
6. The list of known devices that are suitable for
a transfer is displayed. If the device you want
is not there, you can search for further devices. To do this, press “New device” (see also
the section “Points of interest” on page 151).
As soon as the search is complete, a list containing the devices found is displayed.
7. Select the device you want.
 You may first need to authorise a new device.
To find out more, please refer to the section
“Points of interest” on page 151.
Bluetooth® settings
Calling up Bluetooth® settings
1. Press the f button.
2. Select “Stored destinations”.
The personal destination memory is opened.
3. Select a destination.
4. Select “Edit”
> “Send”
> “Bluetooth settings”.
Switching Bluetooth® on
û Select “Switch on Bluetooth” in the Bluetooth®
settings.
Switching Bluetooth® off
û Select “Switch off Bluetooth” in the Bluetooth®
settings.
Sending a destination as a text message
5. If you choose “As SMS”, you must enter the telephone number of the recipient in the input
menu that appears.
You can also select the number from the
phonebook by selecting the corresponding
menu item. To find out more, please refer to
the section “Creating and sending a new text
message” on page 85.
NAVI
149
Adding a new Bluetooth® device
Authorised Bluetooth® devices
For the PCM to find your Bluetooth® device,
please ensure that the Bluetooth® function on the
device has been activated and set to “visible”.
This function allows you to display a list of the
Bluetooth® devices currently authorised to connect with your PCM. The list contains all authorised data devices
1. Select “New data device” in the Bluetooth®
settings.
A search is started and a list of the devices
found is displayed.
2. Choose the device you want by selecting it in
the list.
A Bluetooth® code is displayed that you must
enter in the corresponding Bluetooth® device.
Once you have entered the code, successful
authorisation of the device is shown on the display.
Establishing a connection from an external
Bluetooth® device
To find out more, please refer to the section “Establishing a connection from an external Bluetooth® device” on page 69.
Setting visibility
To find out more, please refer to the section “Setting visibility” on page 69.
150
NAVI
Displaying authorised Bluetooth® devices
û Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth®
settings.
Connecting an authorised Bluetooth® device
with the PCM
 Data devices cannot be connected from the
list of devices; they can only be connected by
calling the appropriate application, for example when transferring a stored destination.
Renaming an authorised Bluetooth® device
1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth®
settings.
2. Select the device you want in the list.
3. Select “Rename”.
The input menu is opened.
4. Enter the name you want and confirm by selecting “OK”.
The name of the device is now changed in the
PCM.
Deleting an authorised Bluetooth® device
from the list
1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth®
settings.
2. Select the device you want in the list.
3. Select “Delete”.
4. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting
“Yes”.
Deleting the list of authorised Bluetooth®
devices
1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth®
settings.
2. Select any device in the list.
3. Select “Delete”.
4. Select “Delete list”.
5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting
“Delete all”.
Displaying details for the authorised
Bluetooth® device
1. Select “List of data devices” in the Bluetooth®
settings.
2. Select any device in the list.
3. Select “Device details”.
The following information is displayed:
– the device name,
– the Bluetooth® address as well as
– the supported services.
Points of interest
Points of interest are petrol stations, car parks,
restaurants, hotels or hospitals, for example.
They are divided into different categories to make
them easier for you to find.
This function is also available in reduced form in
the i menu of the map view:
– when route guidance is active under the
“Search on route” menu item,
– when route guidance is not active under the
“Search surroundings” menu item.
Searching for points of interest by
category
1. Press the f button.
2. Select “POI”
> “Category”.
A list of the available categories is opened.
3. Select the category you want from the list.
A list containing the subcategories is opened.
4. Select the subcategory you want.
5. You can also restrict the search area if you
wish after selecting “Search radius”:
– “Vehicle surroundings”
The search is performed in the vicinity of the
current location.
– “Near destination”
The search is performed in the vicinity of the
currently active destination.
– “Along route”
The search is performed along the calculated route.
– “Free location input”
The search is performed in a user-defined location. You can enter this location in the input menu.
 The “Near destination” and “Along route”
menu items are only available during an active
route guidance session after the route has
been calculated.
6. Select the search area you want.
7. Start the search by selecting “Show results”.
A list containing the search result is displayed.
 If you chose “Free location input” as the
search area, you can expand the radius for a
new search by selecting the “Area search”
menu item in the result list.
 The result lists for the “Vehicle surroundings”
and “Near destination” search areas show the
distance as the crow flies, while the result list
for the “Along route” search area shows the
actual distance.
 You can set alphabetical sorting for the “Near
destination” search area by selecting the first
list entry, “Alphabetical list”.
8. Select the point of interest you want.
 If you fill a data field with the “Distance to next
petrol station” menu item in the personal display of the CAR menu, you can start a route
calculation to this petrol station by touching
the symbol in the data field.
To find out more, please refer to the section
“Setting the contents of the personal display”
on page 113.
NAVI
151
Searching for points of interest by name
1. Press the f button.
2. Select “POI”.
3. Specify “Category” and “Search radius” if applicable.
4. Select “Name”.
The input menu is opened.
5. Enter the first letters of the name of the point
of interest. After you enter the first letters of
the name, a list containing possible matches is
opened.
 If there are fewer than five points of interest
stored for the selected category and search
area, a list of the points of interest is opened
instead of the input menu.
6. Select the point of interest you want in the list.
Searching for points of interest by
telephone number
1. Press the f button.
2. Select “POI”.
3. Select “Telephone number”.
The input menu is opened.
4. Enter the telephone number with country code
(without “+” or “00”) and confirm by selecting
“OK”.
If there is more than one address stored for the
telephone number you have just entered, a list
of the addresses is opened.
5. Select the address you want if necessary.
Searching for points of interest in the
map view
1. Touch the map view.
A crosshair is displayed.
2. Briefly touch the symbol for the point of interest in the map view.
An orange-coloured ring appears around the
point of interest and the name of the point of
interest and the “Details” menu are displayed in
the header.
Open the detailed view by pressing the right rotary knob u or touching the “Details” menu
in the header.
 You can also view the details for a traffic message or destination flag shown on the display
by touching them.
152
NAVI
Starting navigation to the point of interest
Setting a detour from the current position
1. Press the f button.
2. Select “POI”.
- or Touch the map view.
3. Select the point of interest you want.
4. Select “Start route guidance”.
The route is calculated and route guidance
started.
1. Press the f button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Route options”
> “Detour”
> “Distance ahead”.
The map view is displayed. You can see
your current position as well as the route
ahead.
4. Switch from one part of the route section to
the next by selecting the two symbols
and
or by turning t the right rotary knob.
5. Select “Detour” once you have set the part of
the route up to where you want to activate a
detour.
The new route is calculated. The
symbol is
displayed before the “Distance ahead” menu
item.
Changing options for route
guidance
 The options for route guidance are also available to you in the map view.
Setting a detour
To be able to set a detour, you must have activated the route guidance component of your navigation system.
If you set a number of detours, they always refer
to the current route. Older route calculations are
discarded.
Setting an alternative route
1. Press the f button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Route options”
> “Detour”
> “Show alt. routes”.
The map view is displayed. You can see
your current route.
The current route guidance session is
aborted.
4. You can show alternative route suggestions in
the map view by selecting “Route 1”, “Route 2”
or “Scenic route”.
5. Select “Start route guidance” to accept one of
these routes after highlighting it.
 If you exit the menu by pressing the h
button, the previously active route guidance is
resumed and detours already set are discarded.
NAVI
153
Making a detour around route sections
Cancelling a detour
The list of route sections shows the individual sections of the calculated route. The section you are
currently driving on when you call up the list appears at the top of the list.
Selecting “Detour off” cancels all previously set
detours.
The
symbol is no longer displayed and a new
route is calculated.
1. Press the f button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Route options”
> “Detour”
> “Route sections”.
The list of route sections is displayed.
4. Select the route section you want.
A list containing the parts of this route section
is displayed.
5. Select the parts to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) them.
6. Press the Back button h or the f
button to activate the detour.
7. The detour is then set. This is indicated by the
symbol in front of the “Route sections”
menu item.
1. Press the f button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Route options”
> “Detour”
> “Detour off”.
All blocks are cancelled.
154
NAVI
Setting a fast/quick route
These two route options allow you to influence
how the route is calculated.
You can set or change the route options before
the route is calculated or during route guidance.
1. Press the f button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Route options”.
4. Activate or deactivate the route option you
want by selecting it.
– Short route
Calculates the shortest route to the destination.
– Quick route
Calculates the fastest route to the destination.
Setting dynamic route planning (TMC)
If you have activated dynamic route planning, the
traffic messages broadcast by the radio stations
are taken into consideration when calculating the
route.
To find out more about traffic messages, please
refer to the section “Displaying traffic messages
(TMC)” on page 109.
1. Press the f button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Route options”.
4. Select “Dynamic reroute
” to activate ( )
or deactivate ( ) the function.
Avoiding a stretch of road
Stopovers (tour)
Selecting “Avoid” allows you to set restrictions for
route planning.
If a restriction is activated ( ), the PCM calculates
a route without this type of road. The
symbol
is displayed before the “Avoid” menu item.
If route planning is not possible with the restriction
you have set, you are informed of this in an appropriate message.
You can enter up to four stopovers during an active navigation session and arrange them in any order. The route is recalculated and the destinations
are then called at in a so-called tour.
As soon as a stopover is approached as an active
destination, it is also displayed in the list of previous destinations.
1. Press the f button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Route options”
> “Avoid”.
The following menu items are then available
for you to select:
– “Toll
”,
– “Motorway
”,
– “Ferry / Car train
– “Tunnel
”,
” and
– “Mountain passes
”.
4. Select the respective menu items to activate
( ) or deactivate ( ) the function.
The route is recalculated.
The complete tour is displayed in the form of a list
of destinations. The currently active destination is
at the top of the list.
The main destination of the tour is indicated by a
black and white destination flag
and is the last
entry in the list.
 If the active navigation session is an off-road
session, the “Stopovers” and “As stopover”
menu items are replaced with the “List of landmarks” and “As landmark” menu items.
To find out more about off-road navigation,
please refer to the section “Off-road navigation” on page 159.
Entering stopovers
By entering an address
1. Press the f button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Stopovers”
> “Add”
> “Enter address”.
The address input menu is opened.
4. Enter the address you want.
5. Select “Accept”.
If you have already entered at least one stopover, a destination list is opened where you can
define the position of the stopover you are in
the process of entering.
6. Position the stopover by selecting the “empty”
list entry at the position you want in the list.
From the list of previous destinations
1. Press the f button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Stopovers”
> “Add”
> “Previous destinations”.
The list of previous destinations is
opened.
4. Select the destination you want.
The destination is accepted as a stopover.
NAVI
155
From the destination memory
1. Press the f button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Stopovers”
> “Add”
> “Stored destinations”.
The personal destination memory is
opened.
4. Select the destination you want.
The destination is accepted as a stopover.
Entering a point of interest as a stopover
1. Press the f button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Stopovers”
> “Add”
> “POI”.
The POI search is opened.
4. Select the point of interest you want.
The destination is accepted as a stopover.
To find out more about the POI search, please
refer to the section “Points of interest” on
page 151.
Entering a stopover using geographical
coordinates
Inserting a destination from the map (point
positioning)
1. Press the f button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Stopovers”
> “Add”
> “Adv. destination input”
> “Geo. co-ordinates”.
An input menu for geographical coordinates is opened.
4. Enter the geographical coordinates you want
and confirm by selecting “OK”.
1. Touch the map view when route guidance is underway.
A crosshair is displayed.
2. Touch the symbol for a point of interest or any
other point in the map view.
The name of the point of interest or the address of the chosen point is displayed in the
header.
3. Open the detailed view by pressing the right rotary knob u or by touching the header.
4. Select “As stopover”.
The chosen destination is stored in the destination list as point positioning and indicated with
the
symbol.
Entering a stopover using the map
1. Press the f button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Stopovers”
> “Add”
> “Adv. destination input”
> “Destination via map”.
The map view is displayed.
4. Set the destination you want by touching the
map and confirm by selecting “OK”.
Via destinations
If you have selected a motorway junction as a
stopover, this stopover is interpreted as a via destination.
As soon as a stopover is approached as an active
destination, the via destination is also displayed in
the list of previous destinations.
No estimated time of arrival is given for via destinations.
156
NAVI
Deleting stopovers
1. Press the f button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Stopovers”
> “Delete”.
The destination list is opened.
Deleting a destination from the list
4. Select the destination to be deleted in the list.
5. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting
“Yes”.
The destination is deleted from the list.
Deleting the entire list
4. Select a stopover in the list.
5. Select “Delete list”.
6. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting
“Yes”.
The entire list apart from the main destination
is deleted and route guidance is resumed to
the main destination.
Storing stopovers in the personal
destination memory
You can store all stopovers entered as well as the
main destination individually in the personal destination memory.
1. Press the f button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Stopovers”
> “Store”.
The destination list is opened.
4. Select the destination you want to store in the
list.
The input menu is opened.
5. Enter the name you want for the destination
and confirm by selecting “OK”.
The destination is stored in the personal destination memory under the entered name.
Reorganising the stopovers
1. Press the f button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Stopovers”
> “Sort new”.
4. Select the entries in the order you want to navigate to them.
 You can end the reorganisation without
completing it by selecting the Back button
h. The stopovers not yet reorganised
are then appended in their current position to
those already sorted.
Once you have reorganised all the stopovers,
the list is automatically closed and route guidance to the new active destination started.
NAVI
157
Storing
This menu item allows you to store both a destination and your current position.
 You can also access this function in the
i menu in the map view.
Storing a destination
Destination input using
geographical coordinates
If you know the geographical coordinates for a
destination, you can use them for destination input.
1. Press the f button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Adv. destination input”
> “Geo. co-ordinates”.
An input menu is opened.
4. Enter the geographical coordinates you want
and confirm by selecting “OK”.
5. Select “Start route guidance”.
The route is calculated and route guidance
started.
158
NAVI
Destination input using the map
You can use the map view for destination input as
an alternative to entering an address.
1. Press the f button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Adv. destination input”
> “Destination via map”.
The map view is displayed.
4. Set the destination you want by touching the
map.
5. Open the detailed view by pressing the right rotary knob u or touching the “Details” menu
in the header.
6. Select “Start route guidance”.
7. The route is calculated and route guidance
started.
If route guidance is currently active, you can store
either the destination or the entire route depending on the type of route guidance in your personal
destination memory. The menu item provided here
is tailored to the respective situation.
The following options are available:
– “Store destination”
is displayed during route guidance to an address, a geographical coordinate or a point of
interest.
– “Store tour”
is displayed during route guidance to a stopover or to the main destination in a tour.
– “Store landmarks”
is displayed when off-road navigation is active
when tracing a landmark navigation session.
1. Press the f button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Store”.
4. Select the menu item shown (e.g. “Store destination”).
The input menu is opened.
5. Enter the name you want by selecting the individual letters in the input menu and confirm
your entry by pressing “OK”.
Storing a position
You can store your current position in your personal destination memory as a geographical coordinate by selecting “Store position”.
1. Press the f button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Store”.
4. Select “Store position”.
The input menu is opened.
5. Enter the name you want by selecting the individual letters in the input menu and confirm
your entry by pressing “OK”.
Off-road navigation
Display during off-road navigation
Off-road navigation allows you to navigate in nondigitised areas (no digital map data available for
this area on the hard drive).
The following information is displayed during an
active off-road navigation session:
 Observe the applicable regulations in the
country in which you are driving. Driving a vehicle off official roads is not permissible in all
countries.
Off-road navigation is generally performed only
with the aid of direction arrows and simple navigation announcements. Even when you are driving
on a road available in the digital map data on the
hard drive, route guidance is via direction arrows
only.
Off-road navigation works best when the vehicle is
located a significant distance (> 100 m (approx.
330 feet)) from the digitised road network.
– A compass display with a vehicle symbol in the
centre of the compass rose.
– The direction to the next landmark (stopover)
symbolised by an orange-coloured direction arrow.
– The directional deviation from the ideal route is
symbolised by an orange-coloured arc segment.
– The distance as the crow flies to the next landmark (stopover).
Arrival time during off-road navigation
During off-road navigation, the arrival time
displayed in the w menu and elsewhere is calculated based on an assumed average speed of
36 km/h (approx. 22 mph).
NAVI
159
Determination of the vehicle position during
off-road navigation
The vehicle position is determined with the aid of
a GPS antenna and a receiver in the navigation
module. GPS stands for Global Positioning System and is a satellite-assisted position tracking
system.
Further vehicle signals (e.g. speed) are evaluated
and processed in the navigation computer to calculate the vehicle position.
This enables the system to automatically correct
signal changes due to wheel changes (altered tyre
diameter), temperature or air pressure variations.
Activating/deactivating off-road
navigation
1. Press the f button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET NAVI”
> “Off-road”.
4. Select “Off-road” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
 Off-road navigation is automatically activated
when you select an off-road destination (a
landmark list or a trace) from the destination
memory.
160
NAVI
Landmark navigation
Within the framework of landmark navigation you
can
Safety notice for off-road navigation
When you activate off-road navigation you are
shown a notice that off-road navigation serves
only to assist the driver.
û Select “Activate „off-road“” to close this safety
notice.
– enter a destination by entering an address
(> page 141),
– enter a destination by specifying the geographical coordinates (> page 158),
– enter a destination in the map view
(> page 156),
– insert a destination from the list of previous
destinations
(> page 144),
– insert a destination from the personal destination memory (> page 146),
– enter a point of interest (> page 151) and
– enter a maximum of four stopovers, in this
case termed “Landmarks” (> page 155).
Destinations in the digitised area can also be selected from lists and navigated to when off-road
navigation is active.
These destinations are then reinterpreted as offroad destinations and navigated to using landmark
navigation.
 During off-road navigation, only individual destinations (landmarks) are stored in the list of
previous destinations.
Landmark lists can be stored in the personal
destination memory.
Additionally, a compass is displayed at the top left
to aid orientation.
When a landmark is reached, the system outputs
the message “Landmark XX reached”.
Recording a trip section (trace)
Route guidance in landmark navigation
Route guidance is by means of a compass display
with the vehicle symbol in the centre of the compass rose.
The orange-coloured direction arrow always
points in the direction of the landmark currently
being navigated to.
The various landmarks are shown as coloured
flags.
The angular deviation between the current direction of travel and the direction to the next landmark is shown as an orange-coloured arc segment
and indicated in degrees.
Off-road navigation allows you to record a section
of a trip, even in non-digitised areas. This is done
by setting navigation points (“trace points”).
A section of this type is called a trace.
Map view in landmark navigation
The individual landmarks are shown as flags in the
map view:
– Orange-coloured flag: next landmark
– Blue flags: landmarks that have not yet been
driven to
– Checked flag: the current destination landmark.
Traces can be recorded in off-road mode while
route guidance is active.
 You can record and store up to 15 traces in
the personal destination memory.
Traces are not stored in the list of previous
destinations.
The routes between the landmarks that have not
yet been driven are shown with a blue line.
If the route has not yet been covered in full, the
portion of the line already covered is shown in orange.
NAVI
161
Map view during trace recording
During trace recording, the recorded route of the
trace is shown as a blue line in the map view.
Map view when following a trace
When you drive a recorded trace, the route ahead
is shown in the map in orange and the route already covered is shown in grey.
Starting recording
Ending trace recording
1. When off-road navigation is activated, press
the f button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET NAVI”
> “Off-road”
> “Record trace”.
4. Select “From start point” if you want to start recording from the start of the journey. Trace recording is continued, starting from the current
point. The data automatically stored from the
beginning of the journey is transferred.
- or Select “From current position” if you want to
start recording from the current position. The
data automatically stored from the beginning
of the journey is deleted.
1. Press the f button while recording is underway.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET NAVI”
> “Off-road”
> “End trace”.
If you have already recorded a trace during the
trip, deleted the trace or changed the grid for setting the navigation points, you will only be able to
record a new trace using the “From current position” function.
 You can also access the “Record trace” and
“End trace” functions in the option menu in the
map view when off-road navigation is activated.
162
NAVI
Storing a recording
As soon as you end a trace recording you are
asked whether this trace should be stored in the
destination memory.
1. Confirm the prompt that appears by selecting
“Yes”.
2. The input menu is opened. A suggestion for a
name is already provided in the input field.
3. Change the suggested name as you want and
confirm your entry by selecting “OK”.
Setting the grid for automatic setting of the
navigation points
You can set the intervals at which the so-called
trace points are set during trace recording:
– “Optimised”
The navigation system automatically generates a navigation point at geometrically practical locations in order to record the trace.
The number of navigation points set by the system depends on the frequency of the changes
in direction.
– “Set ... mls”
Here you define at what point in the driven
route a navigation point is to be set during
trace recording. The navigation points are set
regardless of any changes in direction.
Up to 1,000 trace points per trace are set during
recording. The setting chosen when setting the
points determines the maximum route that can be
recorded.
The memory remaining for the active recording is
displayed in the map.
1. When off-road navigation is switched on, press
the f button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET NAVI”
> “Off-road”
> “Off-road settings”.
4. Select “Recording mode”.
5. Set the grid you want by selecting it.
Setting trace points manually
You can also set trace points manually during
trace recording.
1. Press the f button while trace recording
is underway.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET NAVI”
> “Off-road”
> “Set trace point”.
Tracing a route
You have various options when tracing routes,
based on the trace direction (“Trace forward” and
“Trace backward”) and trace point (“From start
point” and “From current position”):
– From start point, trace forwards:
You are directed to the start point of the recording and drive the trace from the start point
to the end point.
– From start point, trace backwards:
You are directed to the end point of the recording and drive the trace from the end point to
the start point.
– From current position, trace forwards:
You are directed to the closest point in the
trace and drive the trace in the direction of the
end point.
– From current position, trace backwards:
You are directed to the closest point in the
trace and drive the trace in the direction of the
start point.
After starting navigation, you are navigated to the
next navigation point. Route guidance is by means
of a compass display with the vehicle symbol in
the centre of the compass rose.
NAVI
163
The orange-coloured arc segment points in the direction of the navigation point currently being navigated to. The angular deviation between the current direction of travel and the direction to the next
navigation point is shown as an orange-coloured
segment. The angular deviation is indicated in degrees.
1. Press the f button.
2. Select “Stored destinations”.
The personal destination memory is opened.
3. Select the trace you want in the list.
4. Select “Start route guidance”.
If off-road navigation is not yet activated, the
safety notice is displayed.
5. Confirm the safety notice with “Activate „offroad“” if applicable to activate off-road navigation.
6. Select the direction of travel you want and the
start point you want along the route to be driven.
Route guidance is started.
164
NAVI
Reloading data
Changing the navigation database
If the selected destination lies outside of the current navigation database, a route is calculated to
a point that is close to the destination entered and
is located within the database. Route guidance
from this point is interpreted as off-road route
guidance, as there is no map data available.
If there is additional map data available on the
PCM, this can be reloaded.
 If a selected destination lies outside of the
current database and there is a geographical
coordinate saved for this destination, route
guidance to this destination can be started.
1. Press the f button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET NAVI”
> “Re-load data”
> “Database switch”.
A list of the available databases is
opened.
4. Select the required database in the list.
5. Confirm the prompt that appears and perform
the database search by selecting “Yes”.
MAP
Map display ............................................... 166
Changing the scale of the map.................. 166
Moving the map....................................... 166
Setting 3D display ................................... 166
Displaying traffic messages...................... 167
Setting the display of the total route.......... 167
Setting autozoom .................................... 167
Displaying destination/location info ........... 167
Operating the map menu using symbols .... 167
Displaying sections of the route ................ 168
Setting the display layout ......................... 168
Compiling map contents........................... 169
Basic voice control functions....................... 175
Setting the volume................................... 175
Map display
165
Map display
MAP
You call up the map view of the navigation system
by pressing the g button.
Your vehicle is shown in the map view as a triangular arrow. The arrowhead points in the direction of
travel. The centre of the vehicle is represented by
the black dot in the middle of the small triangle.
The recommended driving route, streets, rivers,
railroad tracks, wooded areas or lakes are displayed as coloured lines or areas.
The detail depends on the map scale set.
When route guidance is active, either the expected
time of arrival or the remaining trip time in hours
and distance from destination are displayed at the
bottom of the display. You can switch back and
forth between the two options by briefly touching
the display.
166
Map display
You can choose for yourself the content shown in
the map view. To find out more, please refer to the
section “Compiling map contents” on page 169.
 You can also call up and operate the map view
menu using symbols. To find out more, please
refer to the section “Operating the map menu
using symbols” on page 167.
Changing the scale of the map
The current scale is shown in the bottom right of
the map in the map display.
û Set the map scale you want by turning the right
rotary knob t.
A number of map views also display the two symbols
and
û Change the map scale you want by touching
the two symbols on the display.
Moving the map
You can move the map section shown on the display as you want. You have two options for doing
this:
û Briefly touch the display to move the map section so that the centre point of the map is at the
point you touched.
- or -
û Touch and hold a point in the map view to keep
moving the map in the direction of this point.
The map will keep moving until you stop touching the screen.
Setting 3D display
If this function is activated, a three-dimensional
map view is shown.
1. Press the g button.
2. Call up the map view menu by pressing the
right rotary knob r.
3. Select “Bird‘s-eye view” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
Displaying traffic messages
Setting autozoom
Operating the map menu using symbols
When this function is activated, traffic information
is also shown in the map view.
If you have activated this function, the entire current route section is displayed.
As soon as you leave the current route section,
the next route section is displayed in the map. The
map scale is calculated and dynamically adapted
according to the length of the new route section.
If you have activated the “Map menu” menu item
in the map display, you can also operate the map
menu functions by touching the corresponding
symbols on the display.
To find out more, please refer also to the section
“Compiling the map information” on page 169.
1. Press the g button.
2. Call up the map view menu by pressing the
right rotary knob r.
3. Select “Autozoom” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
1. Press the g button.
2. Touch the symbol for the map menu
display.
The following symbols are displayed:
1. Press the g button.
2. Call up the map view menu by pressing the
right rotary knob r.
3. Select “Show traffic” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
Setting the display of the total route
If you have activated this function, the total route
from the vehicle position to the destination flag is
displayed during route guidance.
The map scale is automatically adapted.
1. Press the g button.
2. Call up the map view menu by pressing the
right rotary knob r.
3. Select “Total route” to activate ( ) or
deactivate ( ) the function.
Displaying Destination/Location info
When route guidance is active, selecting the
“Show destination” or “Show location” function
displays the relevant position in accordance with
the zoom functions currently active.
1. Press the g button.
2. Call up the map view menu by pressing the
right rotary knob r.
3. Select “Show destination”.
The destination town is displayed on the map.
4. If necessary, select “Show location”.
The current location of the vehicle is displayed
on the map.
on the
Switch three-dimensional map view
on/off
Show/hide traffic messages
Switch display of the total route on/off
Switch autozoom on/off
Switch between location map and
destination map
Map display
167
3. To activate or deactivate a menu item, briefly
touch the menu item on the display.
 When menu items are activated, the corresponding symbols are displayed in orange.
Displaying sections of the route
If you have started the route guidance component
of your navigation system, a list containing all sections of your route will be displayed.
1. Press the g button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “Route list”.
The sections of your route are listed and displayed.
The section you are currently driving on is at
the very top of this list and the final destination
at the very bottom.
4. Select the section you want for a more detailed
view.
You then see a map section showing the route
section in question.
168
Map display
5. You can adjust the map scale by touching the
two symbols
and
, as well as scroll
through the various sections by touching the
symbols
and
6. If you wish to detour around this section of
your route, select “Detour”.
To find out more about setting detours, please
refer to the section “Setting a detour” on
page 153.
 This function is also available under the
“Route list” menu item in the d menu.
If off-road navigation is activated, a restricted
version of this function is available with socalled landmark navigation.
Setting the display layout
You have four options for dividing the display while
route guidance is active:
– “Full screen map”
The map is shown across the entire display.
– “With guidance”
In addition to the relevant map section, the
next driving instruction is shown in the right
half of the display.
– “With direction list”
In addition to the relevant map section, the
next manoeuvre is shown with the help of pictograms.
– “With route preview”
In addition to the map section containing the
current position, a further map section containing the route ahead is shown.
1. Press the g button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET MAP”
> “Map layout”.
The various options for the display layout
are shown.
4. Select the layout you want.
The chosen layout is set.
Compiling map contents
Switching between different layouts
1. Press the g button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET MAP”
> “Map view”.
û If you choose the “With guidance”, “With direction list” or “With route preview” layout, you
can switch to the full-screen map by briefly
touching the right half of the display.
The driving instructions are then shown in a
small window in the top left corner of the display.
û In the “Full screen map” layout, you can switch
to the previously set split screen layout by
briefly touching the so-called mini driving instructions in the top left corner.
You can adapt the map view to your requirements
by selecting various elements and settings.
Compiling the map information
The following map display criteria are then available to you:
– “Junction zoom”
When this function is activated, the upcoming
driving manoeuvre (e.g. leaving the motorway)
is displayed greatly enlarged during route guidance.
 If you press the Back button h while a
driving manoeuvre is shown in enlarged form,
the enlarged view is cancelled. However, the
function remains active.
Pressing the Back button h again reactivates the enlarged display.
 If you have activated the “Junction zoom”
function and an upcoming driving manoeuvre
is displayed in enlarged form, it is not possible
to display another function such as “Show
destination” at this point.
– “Bird‘s-eye view”
When this function is activated, a perspective
map view is displayed.
– “Terrain model (Bird‘s-eye view)”
When this function is activated, a 3D terrain
model is displayed.
– “3D building”
When this function is activated, a 3D town
model is displayed when the 3D map is activated.
– “3D POIs”
When this function is activated, the 3D points
of interest are only displayed in the 3D map.
– “Satellite image”
When this function is activated, a satellite image is displayed for a scale of over 2 km (approx. 1.2 miles).
– “Speed limit”
When this function is activated, speed limits
are displayed in the driving instructions (see
CAR).
Map display
169
WARNING!
Accident hazard. The navigation system is
only intended as an aid to the driver. This does
not release you from your full responsibility for
observing road safety, traffic conditions, legal
road traffic regulations and any other relevant
regulations while driving your vehicle.
Road signs en-route should always be heeded.
The speed limit displayed by the PCM may not
always be correct.
As the driver, you must assess the particular
speed limit. You have sole responsibility for
road safety while driving your car.
û Continue to heed road signs en-route.
– “Show traffic”
When this function is activated, the traffic messages are displayed in the map view.
– “Guidance”
When this function is activated, driving instructions are displayed in the form of arrow symbols.
– “Footer (station/track)”
When this function is activated, the footer is
also shown in the map view.
170
Map display
– “Map menu”
When this function is activated, a symbol is displayed in the map view that gives you access
to all of the functions of the map menu.
– “North arrow”
When this function is activated, a north arrow
is displayed.
– “North orientation”
When this function is activated, the map will be
oriented to the north. If the “Bird‘s-eye view”
option is active, the “North orientation” option
has no function.
– “Day/night switchover”
The following options are available for you to
select:
– “Automatic”
The map view automatically switches from
day design to night design as a function of
the vehicle lighting.
– “Day”
The map view always remains set to the day
design colours. This means the display colours are optimised for legibility.
– “Night”
The map view always remains set to the
night design colours. The display colours are
dimmed to prevent glare.
– “Display arrival time”
You can choose whether the estimated “Arrival
time” or the “Remaining time” is to be displayed in the map view.
4. Select the various list items to show ( ) or
hide ( ) them in the map view.
The map view is adapted in accordance with
your settings.
Compiling the points of interest to be
displayed
1. Press the g button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET MAP”
> “Show POIs”.
The list containing the various point of interest categories is displayed.
4. Select the point of interest category you want.
The list containing the associated subcategories is displayed.
5. Select the various subcategories to show ( )
or hide ( ) them in the map view.
The map view is adapted in accordance with
your settings.
Voice control
How voice control works............................. 172
Incorrect operation and cancelling
a dialogue ............................................... 172
Functions of the button on the stalk for
direction indicators, high beam and
headlight flasher ...................................... 172
Speech intelligibility.................................. 172
Symbols in sample dialogues ...................... 173
Commands ................................................ 173
Local commands .................................... 173
Global commands ................................... 173
Voice entries .......................................... 174
Activating voice control ............................ 175
Deactivating voice control ........................ 175
Setting the language ............................... 175
Configuring the voice control system......... 176
Performing voice adaptation ..................... 177
Using the help function ............................... 177
Operating lists using voice control ............ 178
Operating examples ................................... 179
Operating example for radio mode ............ 179
Operating example for TV tuner ................ 181
Operating example for CD/DVD mode ....... 182
Operating example for iPod mode ............. 183
Operating example for telephone mode ..... 185
Operating example for navigation mode..... 189
Operating example for map ...................... 192
Voice control
171
Please refer to the information on operation
and road safety on page 6.
Incorrect operation and cancelling a
dialogue
The PCM is fully voice controllable (with the exception of the functions in the w and b
menus as well as the various SET menus).
If you say an incorrect or unavailable command,
the voice control system responds with “Could you
repeat that?” and you can repeat the command.
After the 2nd failed attempt, the system offers assistance; after the 3rd failed attempt, the PCM
aborts the operation and terminates the dialogue
with “End”.
Voice control
The voice control system is designed so that you
can generally say each menu item shown on the
display. Exceptions are indicated by an appropriate message on the display of the PCM.
Voice control is activated by pressing the button
on the stalk for the direction indicators, high beam
and headlight flasher (please see also section “Activating voice control” on page 175). This allows
you to operate the PCM without taking your hands
from the steering wheel.
How voice control works
The voice control system recognises commands
or numerical sequences regardless of the speaker. It provides acoustic feedback and guides you
through the functions.
172
Voice control
You have the following options for terminating
voice control during a dialogue:
û Say “cancel” when the voice control system is
expecting a command.
û Say “End” when the voice control system is expecting a command.
û Press any button on the PCM.
The PCM then executes the function corresponding to the pressed button.
û The only exception to this is the volume control. You can only use this button to adapt the
volume of the announcements, not to terminate a dialogue.
Functions of the button on the stalk for
direction indicators, high beam and
headlight flasher
By pressing the button on the stalk for direction indicators, high beam and headlight flasher you can:
– terminate a voice control announcement while
it is in progress,
– skip to the next part of the announcement in
the case of announcements with multiple
parts,
– cancel a dialogue manually.
The button has no function during a telephone call.
Speech intelligibility
To make it easier for your voice control system to
understand your commands, please note the following points:
– The hands-free microphone is directed towards the driver’s seat. The voice control system should therefore be operated by the driver.
– Do not speak while your voice control system
is making an announcement.
– Speak without interruptions and at a normal
volume. Avoid long pauses and excessive emphasis.
– Reduce background noise by closing the windows, doors and sunroof.
– While giving voice commands, avoid other
noise in the vehicle (e.g. passengers speaking
among themselves).
WARNING!
Accident hazard Since stressful situations
can cause your voice to change, it may happen
that a telephone connection you want is not established quickly enough.
û Do not use the voice control system to operate the telephone in cases of emergency.
For safety reasons, an emergency call can
only be initiated directly on the device.
Symbols in sample dialogues
Commands
A number of the voice commands initiate dialogues between you and the voice control system.
A few of these dialogues are presented in the operating manual as examples.
The commands supported by your voice control
system are divided into two categories:
The following symbols are used in the sample dialogues:
y symbol
This symbol identifies a voice command spoken
by you.
; symbol
This symbol identifies an announcement made by
the PCM.
symbol
This symbol identifies a message shown on the
PCM display.
BeepÒsymbol
This symbol identifies the audible signal that
sounds as soon as the PCM is ready to accept a
command.
Local commands
Local commands can only be spoken within the respective main function. They are not listed here
since they include all menu items shown on the
display. The only exceptions are the w and
b menus as well as the various SET menus. These are not voice controllable.
Voice control for lists is different and is described
in the section “Operating lists using voice control”
on page 178.
Global commands
Global commands can be spoken in any function.
They include:
– the main functions of your PCM,
– selected shortcuts (branching directly to a
function without opening its main function beforehand) as well as
– the various help topics.
Voice control
173
Global commands for the voice-controlled main
functions:
–
–
–
–
–
–
Tuner, radio
Disc, CD
phone, Telephone
info
navi, Navigation
map
Global commands for the non-voice-controlled
main functions:
Global commands related to the telephone:
– call, phone
– call name, make call to name
– Dial number
Global commands related to navigation:
go to destination, go to destination ...*
begin route guidance
cancel route guidance
enter address
174
input country
input town
input street
input junction
go home
go to office
search ATM
search hotel
search restaurant
search petrol station
Global commands for the help function:
– sound
– car
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Voice control
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
help
help voice control
help devices
help source
help tuner
help disc
help phone, help telephone
help info
help navi, help navigation
help map
help option
Other global commands:
–
–
–
–
–
source
traffic messages
set TP
deactivate set TP
traffic messages, show traffic messages,
Read out traffic messages on route
– cancel, end
– back
Voice entries
You can assign so-called voice entries for entries
in the phonebook as well as for destinations in
your personal destination memory.
These voice entries are intended to make it easier
for you to call up people or places with names that
are difficult to understand (e.g. foreign names).
You can assign 20 voice entries each for the
phonebook and destination memory.
 Please note that recognition of the voice entries depends on the language currently selected for the voice control system.
Therefore, always use the language that you
wish to use for voice control when creating
the voice entries.
If you change the language, the system may
no longer reliably recognise the voice entries
that you have trained it for in another language.
As soon as the voice control system is activated,
you will see one of the following symbols at the top
right of the display:
–
= The voice control system is awaiting
a spoken command.
–
= The voice control system is currently
making an announcement.
Deactivating voice control
Basic voice control functions
Activating voice control
You cannot activate the voice control system while
you are on a telephone call.
1. Switch on the ignition and the PCM.
2. Press the button on the stalk for the direction
indicators, high beam and headlight flasher.
An audible signal sounds after a short time, the
voice control system is activated and awaits a
spoken command. If you do not say a command, the voice control system prompts you
to speak with the request, “Could you repeat
that?”.
You can deactivate the voice control system as follows:
û Press the button on the stalk for the direction
indicators, high beam and headlight flasher.
- or -
û Say “cancel” or “end” when the voice control
system is expecting a command.
After the system is deactivated, you will hear a
confirmation announcement of “End”, after which
the voice control system switches off.
Setting the volume
You can change the volume of the voice control
system announcements to compensate for changes in the ambient noise during the journey, for example.
1. Activate the voice control system and say a
command such as “help”.
2. Turn the volume control on your device during
an announcement to raise or lower the volume
of the announcement.
 The volume of the voice control system announcements is independent of that of the telephone and audio system.
Setting the language
The voice control system recognises various languages. When you change the language, it affects
voice input by the user, voice output by the PCM
and the language shown on the display.
Voice control
175
Selecting the language yourself
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PCM system”
> “PCM language”.
4. Select the language you want.
Adapting the language to the instrument
cluster
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PCM system”
> “PCM language”.
4. Select “Automatic”.
The language of the instrument cluster is set.
 If the language of the instrument cluster is not
available as a language in the PCM, the language “English GB” is set.
176
Voice control
Configuring the voice control system
You can configure how you interact with the voice
control system in just a few steps.
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PCM system”
> “Voice control”.
The following options are then available for you
to select:
– “Repeat”
The voice control system repeats all recognised commands. You can switch off this
repetition. Switching it off makes using the
voice control system faster but this comes
at the expense of not knowing whether the
voice control system has correctly recognised the command given.
Voice entries and digits are always repeated,
even if the function is switched off.
– “Quick dialog”
If you activate this function, the PCM outputs
certain announcements in an abridged form.
This does not change the information content of the announcements. This option is
useful for experienced users.
– “Show hints”
This function is switched on at the factory. If
it is switched on and voice control is activated, the PCM shows you commands that are
available in addition to the menu items already shown.
4. Select to activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the respective function.
Performing voice adaptation
The voice adaptation function allows you to individually adapt the voice control system to your voice,
thereby improving the voice recognition. This
does not impair the recognition of other users.
 Adaptation can only be performed when the
vehicle is stationary. Please note the first five
points in the section “Speech intelligibility” on
page 172 in connection with this.
Starting/cancelling voice adaptation
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PCM system”
> “Voice control”
> “Voice adaptation”.
4. Select “Start adaptation”.
Adaptation starts and commences interaction
with the user.
5. Follow the instructions of the PCM and repeat
each command and numerical sequence after
the tone.
Adaptation ends automatically after the last
command and the data is automatically stored.
6. Select “Cancel” to abort the adaptation.
In this case no data is stored.
Deleting voice adaptation
1. Press the w button.
2. Press the i button or touch the tab of
the same name in the header.
3. Select “SET PCM system”
> “Voice control”
> “Voice adaptation”.
4. Select “Delete adaptation”.
5. Select “Yes” or “No”.
The adaptation is deleted or not deleted depending on your selection.
Using the help function
Help functions in the PCM
The voice control system features an integrated
help function with commands that are always available. You will find an overview of the commands in
the section “Global commands”, subsection “Global commands for the help function:” on
page 174.
Below you will find a brief description of the most
important help commands.
– “help” command:
When you say this command, the PCM reads
out the commands available for the menu
items currently shown. It also tells you the
commands to use to obtain further help.
– “help voice control” command:
This command interactively guides you to the
help you need using the available help topics
and help areas.
– “help devices” command:
After this command, the PCM prompts you for
the main function on which you need help,
for example tuner or disc. You are then interactively guided to the help you want using the
available help topics and help areas.
Voice control
177
- or -
– “help” command, followed by a main function,
e.g. “Disc”:
This command allows you to skip the step of
specifying the main function for which you
need help. It brings you directly to the help for
a specific main function.
Like the voice control system, you can also deactivate the help. To find out how to do this, please
refer to the section “Deactivating voice control” on
page 175.
Help texts in the instrument cluster
During a dialogue between you and the voice control system, information, voice-controlled commands and lists are displayed in the instrument
cluster of your vehicle.
To find out more, please refer also to the corresponding chapter in the owner’s manual.
û Say the command “line number”, directly followed by the number you see on the right end
of the row.
Non-voice-controlled lists
With non-voice-controlled lists, you can only select
a row using the row number.
Operating lists using voice control
Scrolling in a list
You can scroll through any list using the commands “scroll down” and “scroll up”.
Voice-controlled lists
If you see the
symbol to the right of a list entry,
it means that the list is voice controllable.
You have the following options for selecting a row
in voice-controlled lists:
û Saying the contents as they are displayed in
the row.
178
Voice control
û Say the command “line number”, directly followed by the number you see on the right end
of the row.
Reading out list contents
In voice-controlled lists you can have the list contents read out. The PCM starts with the highlighted
list row and reads out the list down to the last row.
û Say the command “read out”.
Operating example for radio mode
Tuning to a currently receivable FM station
Calling up radio mode and switching
waveband
If you know the currently receivable FM stations
and if radio mode is your active audio source, you
can tune to the station you want by saying its
name.
û Activate voice control.
; Beep Ò
y“Tuner”.
; “Tuner”.
Operating examples
The voice control system is designed so that you
can say each menu item shown on the display. If
you activate the “Show hints” function, exceptions
are indicated by an appropriate message on the
display of the PCM.
The PCM also shows you the most relevant commands possible at that time as soon as you are
prompted to enter a command. To find out more,
please refer to the section “Configuring the voice
control system” on page 176.
Due to the large number of control options, we
have chosen to provide a number of operating examples on the following pages instead of a full listing of all voice-controlled functions.
The PCM switches to radio mode if another
mode was active prior to the command being
entered. If radio mode was already active, the
waveband is switched.
Selecting the preset memory
You can select a preset memory directly. Do this
by saying the command “preset memory FM 1”,
for example.
û Activate voice control.
; Beep Ò
y“Station BBC Radio 3”.
; “Station KCRW”.
The PCM tunes to the corresponding station.
Tuning to stored FM stations
You can either say the name of a stored station
from the FM main menu or the number of the corresponding memory location.
û Activate voice control.
; Beep Ò
y“Station BBC Radio 3”.
; “Station KCRW”.
Voice control
179
- or -
û Activate voice control.
; Beep Ò
y“Station number 1”.
; “Station number 1”.
The PCM tunes to the corresponding station.
Example for entering the frequency 98.4 MHz in
the FM waveband:
û Activate voice control.
; Beep Ò
y“Manual tune”.
; “Manual tune”.
The display switches to the frequency input
menu.
Tuning to stored AM stations
You can say the memory location of a stored station from the AM main menu.
û Activate voice control.
; Beep Ò
y“Station number 1”.
; “Station number 1”.
The PCM tunes to the corresponding station.
Entering a frequency
You can also tune to FM and AM stations by entering the frequency. The frequency input menu only
accepts frequencies within the given waveband:
– FM waveband: 87.5 - 108.0 MHz,
with 0.5 MHz increments.
– AM waveband: 531 kHz - 1620 kHz,
with 1 kHz increments.
180
Voice control
“Please say the desired frequency”.
Beep Ò
Automatic station search (autostore)
The automatic station search fills the memory of
the preset memory currently selected with the six
stations with the strongest reception signal at the
present time.
Any stations that have already been stored
(e.g. manually stored) are overwritten.
This function is not available for preset memories
BEST FM and MIXED.
Example for entering an autostore in the preset
memory FM1:
û Activate voice control.
y“Ninety-eight point four”.
; Beep Ò
; “Frequency Ninety-eight point four megahertz”.
y“Autostore FM1”.
The PCM tunes to the corresponding frequency; the frequency input menu stays open.
; “Autostore FM1”.
 With the command “frequency” directly followed by the MHz frequency you want, you
can enter a frequency without the display
changing to the frequency input menu.
Station search
You can use the commands “next station” and
“previous station” to start the station search in the
FM or AM waveband. The search scans upwards
or downwards and automatically stops at the next
receivable station.
The PCM starts the function.
Starting/stopping the scan function
If you activate this function, each station found
within the frequency range will be played for approx. 5 seconds.
û Activate voice control.
; Beep Ò
y“Start scan”.
;
“Start scan”.
The PCM plays the stations one after the other.
û Activate voice control.
; Beep Ò
y“Stop scan”.
; “Stop scan”.
The PCM tunes to the station currently playing.
Switching the traffic programme on/off
Switch the traffic programme on and off using “set
TP” and “deactivate set TP”.
Tuning to stations from the station list
The station list is available in the FM waveband and
contains all currently receivable stations.
û Activate voice control.
; Beep Ò
y“Station list”.
; “Station list”.
û Scroll through the list using the commands
“scroll down” or “scroll up” until you find the
station you want.
The following two options are available to you for
tuning to a station:
Operating example for TV tuner
y“Station BBC Radio 3”.
; “Station BBC Radio 3”.
; Beep Ò
y“Tuner TV”.
; “Tuner TV”.
The PCM tunes to the station BBC Radio 3.
- or -
y“Line number 3”.
; “Line 3”.
The PCM tunes to the corresponding station.
 You can also tune to a station from the station
list directly without calling up the list first. Say
the “Station” command, directly followed by
the name of the station as it appears in the
list.
The station list is a voice-controlled list; to find
out more about this please refer also to the
section “Operating lists using voice control”
on page 178.
Calling up TV mode
û Activate voice control.
The PCM switches to TV mode.
Selecting the preset memory
You can select a preset memory directly. Do this
by saying the command “preset memory TV 1”,
for example.
Station search
You can use the commands “next station” or “previous station” to start the station search. The
search scans upwards or downwards and automatically stops at the next receivable station.
The station list is displayed.
Voice control
181
Tuning to stations from the station list
The station list contains all the stations that can
currently be received.
û Activate voice control.
; Beep Ò
y“Read out station list”.
; “Read out station list”.
The stations are read out one after the other.
The following two options are available to you for
opening a video text page:
y“next page”.
; “next page”.
The PCM opens the page.
- or -
y“Page 333”.
; “Page 333”.
The PCM opens the corresponding page.
The following two options are available to you for
tuning to a station:
y“Station BBC1”.
; “Station BBC1”.
The PCM tunes to BBC1.
- or -
y“Line number 3”.
; “Line 3”.
The PCM tunes to the corresponding station.
; Beep Ò
y“Video text”.
; “Video text”.
Video text appears.
182
Voice control
The track list is displayed.
Selecting a track from the track list:
û Scroll through the list using the commands
“scroll down” or “scroll up” until you find the
track you want.
y“Line number 3”.
; “Line 3”.
The PCM plays the corresponding track.
Operating example for CD/DVD mode
Calling up CD/DVD mode
û Activate voice control.
; Beep Ò
y“Disc”.
; “Disc”.
The PCM switches to disc mode.
Calling up video text pages
û Activate voice control.
y“Track list”.
; “Track list”.
Selecting a track from the track list
The track list contains all the tracks on the CD/
DVD currently being played.
û Activate voice control.
Beep Ò
 If the disc currently playing is an MP3 CD/
DVD, the track list shows the names of the
root directories as well as the subdirectories.
You can also choose folders and playlists using the “line number” command, directly followed by the corresponding number.
The track list is a non-voice-controlled list; to
find out more about this please refer also to
the section “Operating lists using voice control” on page 178.
Choosing a track by skipping
You can skip to the previous or next track using
the “previous track” and “next track” commands
respectively.
Choosing a track by entering the track
number
You can select a track directly in CD/DVD mode
using the “track number” or “track” command, directly followed by the corresponding number.
Choosing a disc using the disc list
Choosing a CD/DVD by entering the disc
number
You can select a specific disc directly using the
“Disc number” command, directly followed by the
corresponding number.
When this function is activated, the current track
or chapter (video DVD mode) is repeated.
Activate and deactivate the repeat function using
the “activate repeat” and “deactivate repeat” commands.
Switching the shuffle function on/off
; Beep Ò
y“Disc selection”.
; “Disc selection”.
When this function is activated, the PCM plays the
tracks on the disc currently playing in random order.
Activate and deactivate the shuffle function using
the “activate shuffle” and “deactivate shuffle” commands.
The disc list is displayed.
When this function is activated, the PCM plays a
brief snippet of each track on the disc currently
playing in sequence.
Start and stop the scan function using the “Start
scan” and “Stop scan” commands.
Repeating a track
The disc list contains all available CDs/DVDs.
û Activate voice control.
Scanning tracks
Operating example for iPod mode
Calling up iPod mode
û Activate voice control.
; Beep Ò
y“Disc iPod”.
; “Disc iPod”.
The PCM switches to iPod mode.
; “Please say the number of the required disc”.
y“Disc number 3”.
; “Disc number 3”.
The PCM plays the corresponding CD/DVD.
 The disc list is a non-voice-controlled list; to
find out more about this please refer also to
the section “Operating lists using voice control” on page 178.
Voice control
183
Selecting a track from the track list
û Activate voice control.
; Beep Ò
y“Track list”.
; “Track list”.
The track list is displayed.
 The iPod determines the sorting of the lists.
Selecting a track from the track list:
û Scroll through the list using the commands
“scroll down” or “scroll up” until you find the
track you want.
y“Line number 3”.
; “Line 3”.
The PCM plays the corresponding track.
Choosing a track by skipping
You can skip to the previous or next track using
the “previous track” and “next track” commands
respectively.
Choosing a track by entering the track
number
You can select a track directly in iPod mode using
the “track number” or “track” command, directly
followed by the corresponding number.
184
Voice control
Repeating a track
Activating this function repeats the current track.
Activate and deactivate the repeat function using
the “activate repeat” and “deactivate repeat” commands.
Switching the shuffle function on/off
When this function is activated, the PCM plays the
tracks in the track list in random order.
Activate and deactivate the shuffle function using
the “activate shuffle” and “deactivate shuffle” commands.
Searching for music
You can start a music search in iPod mode based
on the following criteria:
– Artists,
– albums,
– track and
– music genres.
Below is an example of how to perform a search
for the tracks of a specific artist.
û Activate voice control.
; Beep Ò
y“Find music”.
; “Find music”.
y“Artists”.
; “Artists”.
A list of all the artists whose tracks are stored
on the iPod is displayed.
û Scroll through the list using the commands
“scroll down” or “scroll up” until you find the
track you want.
y“Line number 3”.
; “Line 3”.
y“activate repeat”.
The PCM plays the corresponding track.
Operating example for telephone mode
Calling up telephone mode
û Activate voice control.
WARNING!
Injury hazard. In emergency situations,
stress may cause your voice to change to an
extent where it might take longer than normal
to establish a telephone connection.
û Do not use the voice control system in cases of emergency.
Injury hazard. The telephone must not be
used near explosives or flammable materials
(e.g. at a petrol station) or near operations involving explosives.
Mobile phones must be switched off in certain
hazardous areas such as near petrol stations,
fuel depots, chemical plants and demolition
work in progress using explosives, for example. They can interfere with technical equipment.
û Please heed appropriate warnings.
û Observe statutory regulations and local restrictions when using the telephone.
; Beep Ò
y“Telephone”.
; “Telephone”.
The PCM switches to telephone mode.
Entering the PIN
The digits “zero” to “nine” are permitted when entering the PIN. The following two options are available to you when saying the digits:
– Say all digits in a single block without a pause.
– Group and say the individual digits in blocks,
for example the first three digits and then the
next three digits. Leave a pause after each
block and wait until the PCM has repeated the
digits from the last block entered before saying the next block.
If you say the digits in blocks, you can use the
“correction” command to delete the last block.
The PCM then repeats the last correct block and
you can continue with your input.
You can delete the complete entry using the “delete” command.
If you are saying all the digits without a pause,
both these commands delete the complete entry.
û Activate voice control in the PIN input menu
(see above).
“The PIN, please.”.
Beep Ò
y“One two three four”.
Voice control
185
;
“One two three four”.
Beep Ò
y“Ok”.
; “Checking the PIN”.
The PCM switches to telephone mode if the entered PIN is correct.
Entering a telephone number
The digits “zero” to “nine” as well as the following
words are permitted when entering the digits:
– “Star” for the * character
– “hash” for the # character
– “plus” for the + character
When calling international telephone numbers, use
the word “plus” at the beginning of the number, followed by the country code. Then enter the local
area code without the first digit, and then the telephone number.
The following two options are available to you
when saying the telephone number:
– Say all digits in a single block without a pause.
– Say the telephone number in blocks, leaving a
pause after each block and waiting until the
PCM has repeated the digits from the last
block entered before saying the next block.
186
Voice control
If you say the telephone number in blocks, you can
use the “correction” command to delete the last
block. The PCM then repeats the last correct
block and you can continue with your input.
The “delete” command deletes the complete entry.
If you are saying all the digits without a pause,
both these commands delete the complete entry.
If you try to enter more than 32 digits, you will
hear an announcement that the number is too long
and that the last input has been deleted.
Example for an overseas call to Germany:
û Activate voice control.
; Beep Ò
y“Dial number”.
; “Dial number.”
Beep Ò
y“plus four nine”.
; “Plus four nine”.
Beep Ò
y“Seven two four eight”.
“Seven two four eight”.
Beep Ò
y“Seven one zero”.
; “Seven one zero”.
Beep Ò
y“Call number”.
; “Dialling the number.”
The PCM dials the number.
 The “Dial number” command is a global command and therefore also works in other
modes (e. g. navigation mode). You will find
other global commands in the section “Global
commands” on page 173.
Calling up the phonebook
û Activate voice control.
; Beep Ò
y“Phonebook”.
; “Phonebook”.
The phonebook is displayed as a list.
Calling a phonebook entry
û Scroll through the list using the commands
“scroll down” or “scroll up” until you find the entry you want.
The following two options are available to you
for making a call to an entry:
1. Say the “Call” command, directly followed
by the name of the entry.
This option is global and also works outside
the phonebook.
2. Say the command “line number”, directly
followed by the corresponding number
shown on the right end of the row.
This option is not global and only works
within the phonebook. Furthermore, unlike
option 1, it does not result in direct dialling
of the telephone number.
 If you are saying the name of a phonebook entry, please note the following:
û Say the name as normal, do not spell it
out.
û If the name of a phonebook entry is in a
language other than that currently set in
the PCM, the voice control system may
not recognise it correctly.
With phonebook entries with multiple numbers, the entry can also be directly selected
by additionally speaking the category
(e.g. “Mr. Smith Office”). If the specified category does not exist for this entry, the available
categories are announced.
Example for option 1:
û Activate voice control.
; Beep Ò
y“Call Information”.
; “Dialing the number of Information.”
The PCM dials the number.
Example for option 2:
û Activate voice control.
; Beep Ò
y“Line number 3”.
; “Line 3”.
The details for the corresponding phonebook
entry are displayed.
û Activate voice control.
; Beep Ò
y“Call number”.
; “Call number.”.
“Dialling the number.”.
The PCM dials the number.
Assigning a voice entry for an entry in the
phonebook
The command “Change pronunciation” can be
used to store speech entries for entries in the telephone book of your telephone. You can use these
voice entries to make a call without having to enter
the other person’s number.
Voice control
187
To store a voice entry, you must first select an entry in the phonebook containing both a name and
a telephone number.
û Activate voice control.
; Beep Ò
y“Change pronunciation”.
; “Change pronunciation. Please say a name.”
Beep Ò
y“Mr. Smith”.
; “Please say the name a second time.”
Beep Ò
y“Mr. Smith”.
; “The pronunciation Mr. Smith has been
stored.”
The voice entry has been stored for the entry
in the phonebook.
The command “delete pronunciation” is used to
delete an existing speech entry.
188
Voice control
List of previous calls
û Activate voice control.
The “Previous calls” menu provides you access to
a list of the telephone numbers you have recently
dialled. You can select a list entry using voice control and call it again.
; Beep Ò
y“Received calls”.
; “Received calls”.
û Activate voice control.
; Beep Ò
y“Previous calls”.
; “Previous calls”.
The list of previous calls is displayed.
To find out how to select a list entry and make a
call, please refer to the section “Calling a phonebook entry” on page 187.
List of received calls
The “Received calls” menu provides you access to
a list of the calls you have recently received. You
can select a list entry using voice control and call
it back.
The list of received calls is displayed.
To find out how to select a list entry and make a
call, please refer to the section “Calling a phonebook entry” on page 187.
Reading out text messages
(with PCM telephone only)
You can use the “read out messages” command to
skip to the list of text messages and have the message headers read out.
û To have the contents of a text message that is
highlighted in the list read out, say the “read
out details” command.
û To have the contents of an open text message
read out, say the “read out” command.
Operating example for navigation mode
Calling up navigation mode
û Activate voice control.
; Beep Ò
y“Navigation”.
; “Navigation”.
The PCM switches to navigation mode.
Entering an address and starting route
guidance
If the language set in the PCM and the language
spoken at the destination are the same, you can
say the country, town, and street as whole words.
If the two languages are not the same, you must
spell the town and the street. This applies to destinations in countries with more than one official
language and to destinations in other countries.
 If route guidance had previously been started,
the country is already preset. In this case, the
address entry starts with the prompt “Please
say the town”.
If you would like to set another country, you
must start the dialogue with the “input country” command.
û Activate voice control.
; Beep Ò
y“enter address”.
; “enter address”.
“Please say the town”.
Beep Ò
y“Stuttgart”.
; “Please say the street”.
Beep Ò
y“Porschestraße”.
 If the named town and street were uniquely
identified by the voice control system when
entered for the first time, the next step is
skipped and you can proceed directly to entry
of the house number.
A list of towns and/or a list of streets is displayed if necessary.
“Stuttgart, Porschestraße”.
“Would you like to input a street number?”
Beep Ò
y“Yes”.
; “Please say the street number”.
Beep Ò
y“One hundred and thirty two”.
; “One hundred and thirty two”.
“Would you like to start route guidance?”
Beep Ò
y“Yes”.
The PCM calculates the route.
 If you want to start route guidance in the centre of a town, begin the dialogue with the “input town” command. Then select the town
and respond to the request for the street by
saying the “Start route guidance” command.
“Please make your selection”.
Beep Ò
û Scroll through the list in this case using the
commands “scroll down” or “scroll up” until
you find the town you want.
y“Line number 3”.
 If you are unable to find the destination you
want in the town or street list, you can repeat
your entry by selecting the “correction” command.
Voice control
189
Entering a destination from the list of
previous destinations or from the personal
destination memory
The “Previous destinations” menu provides you access to a list of the last destinations to which you
started route guidance.
In the “Stored destinations” menu you will find the
destinations you have stored in your personal destination memory.
 Both lists are voice-controlled lists, to find out
more about this please refer also to the section “Operating lists using voice control” on
page 178.
If you want to transfer a row to the voice control system by saying the contents, please
note also the following:
– You can say all other row contents as they
are displayed. If the voice control system
has difficulty understanding the contents,
we recommend saying the number of the respective row.
– Both lists can contain rows with geographical coordinates. Example: “8° 55’ 32’’ E
48° 51’ 5’’ N”. You cannot select these rows
by saying their contents; you must say the
row number.
û
û
û
190
Voice control
– You can store traces in the personal destination memory. When doing so, the PCM
suggests a name. You cannot select rows
with these default names by saying their
contents.
If you name the trace yourself, however,
you can select the row by saying its contents.
– If you know the name of the destination, you
can start route guidance directly using the
“go to destination ...*” command.
û Activate voice control.
; Beep Ò
y“Previous destinations”.
; “Previous destinations”.
- or -
y“Stored destinations”.
; “Stored destinations”.
The list of previous destinations or the personal destination memory is displayed.
û Scroll through the list using the commands
“scroll down” or “scroll up” until you find the
destination you want.
The following two options are available to you
for starting route guidance to a destination:
1. Say the row contents shown on the display.
2. Say the “line number” command, directly
followed by the corresponding number of
the row, which shown at its right end.
Example for option 1:
û Activate voice control.
; Beep Ò
y“Porschestraße”.
The details for the list entry are displayed.
û Activate voice control.
; Beep Ò
y“Start route guidance”.
; “Start route guidance”.
The PCM calculates the route to the destination.
Example for option 2:
û Activate voice control.
The points of interest menu is displayed.
; Beep Ò
y“Line number 3”.
; “Line 3”.
The category list is displayed.
Scroll through the list using the commands
“scroll down” or “scroll up” commands until
you find the category you want.
û Activate voice control.
y“Start route guidance”.
; “Start route guidance”.
The PCM calculates the route to the destination.
Searching for points of interest
The “POI” menu provides you with access to
points of interest such as petrol stations, parking
areas, restaurants, hotels or hospitals, for example.
The points of interest are divided into different categories to make them easier for you to find.
With the voice control system, you can select a
point of interest by entering the category and subcategory as well as the search area.
Below you will see an example for entering a point
of interest in the vicinity of the vehicle.
“Please select the category”.
Beep Ò
The categories, like the subcategories also, can
all be spoken.
You can, however, also say the number of the line
containing the category you want. The row
number is at the right of the row.
y“Line number 5”.
; “Line 5”.
You see the menu for the search areas. The entered subcategory or the entered marker is
shown on the left beside the “Category” menu
item.
You can now enter the search area in which the
PCM is to search for points of interest.
y“Vehicle surroundings”.
; “Vehicle surroundings accepted.
Please select the destination”.
A list containing the possible points of interest
is displayed.
y“Line number 3”.
; “Line 3.
Would you like to start route guidance?”.
The subcategory list is displayed.
y“Yes”.
“Please make your selection”.
Beep Ò
The PCM calculates the route to the point of interest.
y“Line number 3”.
; “Line 3”.
“Where would you like to search?”.
Beep Ò
Searching for a point of interest with a known
category and search area
You can shorten the input for a search for a point
of interest by grouping the subcategory and
search area in a single command, for example.
û Activate voice control.
; Beep Ò
y“POI”.
; “POI”.
Voice control
191
û Activate voice control.
; “Please select the destination”.
Beep Ò
; Beep Ò
y“Point of interest golf course near destination”. y“Line number 3”.
; “Line 3.
The result list for the search is displayed.
 You can also use the “read out details” command to read out the details of a traffic message as soon as it is highlighted in the list.
Operating example for map
“Please select the destination”.
Beep Ò
y“Line number 3”.
; “Line 3.
Would you like to start route guidance?”.
y“Yes”.
The PCM calculates the route to the point of interest.
Searching for a point of interest along a
route
If route guidance is active, you can search the
planned route for a point of interest using the
“along route” command.
If route guidance is not active, you can instead
search for a specific point of interest using the “in
surroundings” command.
û Activate voice control.
; Beep Ò
y“Search petrol station along route”.
The result list for the search is displayed.
192
Voice control
Would you like to start route guidance?”.
y“Yes”.
Route guidance to the selected point of interest is
started.
Calling up the map view
Announcing traffic messages on the route
; Beep Ò
y“Map”.
; “Map”.
 This function is only available during active
route guidance.
û Activate voice control.
; Beep Ò
y“Read out traffic messages on route”.
; “Read out traffic messages on route”.
The list of traffic messages on the route is displayed.
“A 8 direction... ”
The list of traffic messages on the route is read
out, beginning with the first entry.
The traffic message currently being read is
highlighted.
û Activate voice control.
The PCM switches to the map view.
Setting the map scale
You can say all of the available map scales or display your total route on the map using the “total
route” command.
Setting 3D display
Setting the map orientation
If this function is activated, a three-dimensional
map view is shown.
You can activate and deactivate the function using
the “activate birds eye view” and “deactivate birds
eye view” commands.
You can change the orientation of the map using
the following commands:
Displaying traffic messages
When this function is activated, traffic information
is also shown in the map view.
Activate and deactivate the function using the “activate show traffic” and “deactivate show traffic”
commands.
–
–
–
–
“activate north orientation”,
“deactivate north orientation”,
“show destination” and
“show location”.
Repeating a navigation announcement
If you say the “guidance announcement” command during active route guidance, the last navigation announcement is repeated.
Setting autozoom
If you have activated this function, the entire current route section is displayed.
Activate and deactivate the function using the “activate autozoom” and “deactivate autozoom” commands.
Voice control
193
Index
AAC-LC ................................................................... 35
Accepting a call ................................................ 58 74
Activating alternative routes for route guidance ............ 143
Activating the entry aid............................................. 137
Activating the interface ...................................... 47 48
Activating the rain sensor ......................................... 136
Activating the rear wiper........................................... 137
Adapting the volume for an external audio source ........... 47
Adding destinations to the personal destination memory 147
Alternative frequencies ............................................... 25
Answer button .......................................................... 12
Area search ........................................................... 151
Assigning a key ...................................................... 123
Audio formats........................................................... 35
Audio source
Displaying detailed information ......................... 111
Selecting .......................................................... 8
Automatic call answering ............................................ 95
Automatic station search in radio mode ........................ 24
Automatic station search in TV mode ............................ 28
Autostore (radio) ....................................................... 24
Autostore (TV) .......................................................... 28
AUX ........................................................................ 47
Activating the interface ..................................... 47
Adapting the volume ......................................... 47
Switching to an external audio source .................. 47
AUX BT ................................................................... 48
Activating the interface ..................................... 48
Fast forward/reverse ........................................ 49
Repeating a track ............................................. 49
Shuffle function ................................................ 49
Skipping tracks ................................................ 49
Starting/stopping scanning ................................ 49
Switching to an external Bluetooth® audio source . 48
Avoiding a stretch of road ........................................ 155
Back button ............................................................. 11
Best FM .................................................................. 23
Best FM preset memory ............................................. 23
Bluetooth® .............................................................. 54
Adding a
new device ..........50 68 97 125 133 150
Authorised
devices ...............50 67 95 125 133 150
Calling up
Bluetooth® settings .............49 124 133 149
Connecting an authorised device
with the PCM ........50 67 95 125 133 150
Deleting an authorised device from
the list ................50 67 96 125 134 150
Deleting the list of authorised
devices ...............50 67 96 126 134 150
Disconnecting an authorised and connected
device from the PCM ........................................ 67
Displaying authorised
devices ...............50 67 95 125 133 150
Displaying details for the
authorised device ..51 68 97 126 134 150
Establishing a connection from
an external Bluetooth®
device .................50 57 69 125 133 150
Renaming an authorised
device .................50 67 96 125 133 150
Setting the profile of the authorised device ........... 96
Setting visibility .....50 69 98 125 133 150
Settings (external Bluetooth® audio source) ......... 49
Settings (logbook) .......................................... 124
Settings (navigation) ....................................... 149
Settings (Sport display) ................................... 133
Settings (telephone) .................................. 67 95
Switching Bluetooth®
on/off ................................49 125 133 149
Switching on/off .............................................. 56
Brightness of the display ............................................ 19
Buttons ..................................................................... 9
Call forwarding ......................................................... 93
Call settings ............................................................. 93
Call volume .............................................................. 66
Call waiting ................................ 64 65 81 82 94
Accepting a call ....................................... 64 82
Ending a connected call ............................ 64 82
Rejecting a call ........................................ 64 81
Calling
Dialling a number ..................................... 60 75
Number from the list of previous calls .......... 61 78
Number from the list of received calls.......... 62 79
Phonebook entry ...................................... 61 76
Calling a destination from the personal
destination memory ................................................. 148
Calling the destination .............................................. 146
Cancelling a block ................................................... 154
Cancelling a detour ................................................. 154
CD/DVD
Calling up the CD/DVD changer menu .................. 36
Calling up the main menu................................... 37
Ejecting a CD/DVD (with CD/DVD changer) ........... 36
Ejecting a CD/DVD (with CD/DVD drive) ............... 36
Ejecting all CD/DVDs (with CD/DVD changer) ........ 37
Fast forward/reverse ........................................ 39
Loading a CD/DVD (with CD/DVD changer) ........... 36
Loading a CD/DVD (with CD/DVD drive)................ 36
Loading all CDs/DVDs
(with empty CD/DVD changer) ............................ 36
Naming a CD ................................................... 38
Repeating a track ............................................. 39
Searching for a track (MP3 CD) .......................... 39
Searching for music (MP3 CD) ............................ 39
Selecting a CD/DVD ......................................... 37
Selecting a chapter in video DVD mode ................ 38
Selecting a track .............................................. 37
Selecting a track (MP3 CD) ................................ 37
Setting DVD audio groups .................................. 38
Setting the DVD audio format ............................. 38
Setting the mode ............................................. 37
Skipping to the next track .................................. 39
, , ,
, , ,
, , ,
, , ,
, , ,
, , ,
, , ,
, , ,
, , ,
, , ,
, , , ,
Index
194
Starting/stopping scanning ................................ 39
Switching the shuffle function on/off .................... 39
Changing the PIN ...................................................... 92
Colour (TV)............................................................... 32
Conducting calls with the hands-free unit ............... 58 73
Conference ...................................................... 65 82
Configuring the display............................................... 18
Contrast .................................................................. 32
Controls .................................................................... 9
Copyright ................................................................ 34
Cordless handset .................................................... 101
Accepting a call ............................................. 102
Call waiting (swapping) and conference .............. 103
Charging ...................................................... 101
Dialling a number ........................................... 102
Ending a call ................................................. 102
Establishing an additional call ........................... 102
Muting the microphone ................................... 102
Phonebook ................................................... 104
Rejecting a call .............................................. 102
Settings ....................................................... 107
Switching on/off ............................................ 101
Text messages (SMS) ..................................... 105
Creating a template for SMS ....................................... 90
Deleting .................................................................. 11
Authorised
Bluetooth device ...50 67 96 125 134 150
Contact person (logbook) ................................ 123
Contents of the SIM card ................................... 77
Destination (list of previous destinations) ............ 145
Destinations from the personal
destination memory ........................................ 148
Driver (logbook) ............................................. 123
Key assignment in the logbook ......................... 123
Lap in the Sport display recording ..................... 130
List of authorised
Bluetooth devices .50 67 96 126 134 150
Phonebook entry .............................................. 77
Recording in the Sport display .......................... 130
Reference lap for the Sport display ................... 131
Stopovers ..................................................... 157
Telephone number .....................61 62 78 79
Text message (SMS)......................................... 87
, , ,
, , ,
, , ,
Trip destination (logbook) ................................123
Trip purpose (logbook) ....................................123
Trips in the logbook ........................................123
vCards ...........................................................89
Deleting a destination (list of previous destinations) .......145
Deleting a destination (personal destination memory) .....148
Deleting a lap (Sport display) .....................................130
Deleting characters ...................................................11
Deleting entered characters ........................................11
Destination input using geographical coordinates ..........158
Destination input using the map .................................158
Dialling a number (telephone) .............................. 60 75
Direct dialling ................................................... 60 75
Display ....................................................................12
Cleaning ...........................................................7
Colour touchscreen ..........................................12
Faults ...............................................................7
Operating .......................................................12
Switching back on ............................................18
Switching off ...................................................18
Display faults ..............................................................7
Displaying destination/location ..................................167
Displaying detailed information about the audio source ..111
Displaying driving instructions in the map view..............170
Displaying route sections ..........................................111
Displaying sections of the route .................................168
Displaying speed limits in the map display ...................169
Displaying the footer in the map view ..........................170
Displaying the north arrow in the map view ..................170
Displaying the satellite image in the map view ..............169
Displaying the system version .....................................19
Displaying the total route in the map ...........................167
Displaying traffic messages (TMC)..............................109
Displaying traffic messages in the map view ................170
Dolby® Digital ..........................................................35
DTMF tones ..................................................... 63 80
DTS ........................................................................35
Editing
Address of a destination
(list of previous destinations) ............................145
Address of a destination
(personal destination memory) ..........................147
Data from the current trip (logbook)...................120
Destination name of a personal destination .........148
Phonebook entry ..............................................77
Editing an address (list of previous destinations) ...........145
Editing an address (personal destination memory) .........147
Ejecting a CD ...........................................................11
Ejecting a DVD ..........................................................11
Ejecting CDs/DVDs ....................................................36
Electronic Programme Guide (EPG) ..............................30
Emergency call .........................................................83
End call button..........................................................11
Ending a call..................................................... 59 74
Ending a lap (Sport display) .......................................129
Entering a name........................................................14
Entering a space .......................................................14
Entering an address.................................................141
Entering an address (list of previous destinations) .........145
Entering an address (personal destination memory) .......147
Entering the country ................................................142
Entering the junction ................................................143
Entering the postal code...........................................142
Entering the street ..................................................142
Entering the street number .......................................142
Entering the town ....................................................142
Establishing an additional call .............................. 63 81
Extended memory ...................................................135
External audio source (AUX) ........................................47
Activating the interface ......................................47
Switching to an external audio source ..................47
External Bluetooth® audio source
Activating the interface ......................................48
Switching to an external Bluetooth® audio source ..48
External Bluetooth® audio source (AUX BT) ...................48
, , ,
Fast forward/reverse .......................... 39 42 46 49
Finding the cordless handset .......................................98
Format ....................................................................32
Forward/reverse
AUX BT ...........................................................49
CD/DVD .........................................................39
iPod ...............................................................42
USB ...............................................................46
Frequency entry ........................................................23
Index
195
G
Geographical coordinates ........................................ 158
GPS antenna.......................................................... 140
Help function for the voice control system .................. 177
Holding a call (telephone) .................................... 60 76
IMEI ....................................................................... 92
Individual settings (extended memory) ........................ 135
Input menu
Operating input menus ..................................... 14
Setting the layout ............................................ 15
Interface
AUX .............................................................. 47
iPod .............................................................. 40
USB .............................................................. 43
iPod ....................................................................... 40
Calling up the main menu .................................. 40
Fast forward/reverse ....................................... 42
Playlists ......................................................... 41
Repeating a track ............................................ 42
Searching for a track ....................................... 40
Shuffle function ............................................... 42
Skipping to the next track ................................. 42
Switching to iPod mode .................................... 40
Track list........................................................ 42
iPod interface .......................................................... 40
Jack for iPod ........................................................... 40
Landmark navigation ............................................... 160
Left rotary knob ....................................................... 10
Lift handset button .................................................... 12
List of previous calls .......................................... 61 78
Adding to a number .................................. 62 79
Calling a number ...................................... 61 78
196
Index
Deleting a number ....................................61 78
Displaying the list .....................................61 78
Sending a message to a number from the list ....... 78
Storing a number in the phonebook..................... 78
List of previous destinations ..................................... 144
List of received calls ..........................................62 79
Adding to a number from the list .................63 80
Calling a number from the list .....................62 79
Deleting a number from the list ...................62 79
Displaying the list .....................................62 79
Sending a message to a number from the list ....... 80
Storing a number from the list in the phonebook ... 79
Lists
Operating using voice control .......................... 178
Showing the first letters of the entries ................. 13
Loading a disc ......................................................... 36
Loading CDs/DVDs ................................................... 36
Location information ............................................... 111
Logbook ............................................................... 119
Activating/deactivating ................................... 119
Activating/deactivating the reminder ................. 119
Assigning a key ............................................. 123
Changing the contact person ........................... 121
Changing the driver ........................................ 120
Changing the remarks .................................... 121
Changing the trip destination ........................... 120
Changing the trip purpose ............................... 121
Changing the trip type .................................... 120
Continuing recording ...................................... 121
Creating a contact person ............................... 122
Creating a driver............................................ 122
Creating a new contact person......................... 121
Creating a new driver ..................................... 120
Creating a new trip destination ......................... 120
Creating a new trip purpose ............................ 121
Creating a trip destination ............................... 122
Creating a trip purpose ................................... 122
Deleting a contact person ............................... 123
Deleting a driver ............................................ 123
Deleting a key assignment............................... 123
Deleting a trip destination ................................ 123
Deleting a trip purpose ................................... 123
Deleting trips ................................................ 123
Editing data from the current trip ...................... 120
Managing lists ............................................... 122
Renaming a contact person ............................. 122
Renaming a driver .......................................... 122
Renaming a trip destination ............................. 122
Renaming a trip purpose ................................. 122
Setting the standard trip ................................. 119
Storing a refuelling stop .................................. 122
Transferring data ........................................... 124
Viewing the list of stored trips .......................... 122
Lowering the exterior mirror ..................................... 137
Making a detour around a route section ...................... 153
Manual frequency entry .............................................. 23
MAP ..................................................................... 166
Adapting the map view .................................... 169
Changing the scale ........................................ 166
Display of the total route ................................. 167
Displaying a 3D terrain model .......................... 169
Displaying a 3D town model ............................. 169
Displaying destination/location ......................... 167
Displaying driving instructions in the map view .... 170
Displaying sections of the route ........................ 168
Displaying the footer ...................................... 170
Displaying the map menu ................................ 170
Displaying the north arrow ............................... 170
Displaying the satellite image ........................... 169
Displaying traffic messages ............................. 170
Moving ......................................................... 166
Orienting the map to the north ......................... 170
Selecting display of the arrival time ................... 170
Setting 3D display .......................................... 166
Setting 3D points of interest ............................ 169
Setting a 3D map........................................... 169
Setting autozoom .......................................... 167
Setting display of the arrival time ...................... 170
Setting the colours for the map ........................ 170
Setting the display layout ................................ 168
Setting the display of speed limits..................... 169
Setting the junction zoom ................................ 169
Memory buttons ....................................................... 22
Meridian Lossless Packing ......................................... 35
Microphone volume ................................................... 66
MIXED .................................................................... 23
MIXED preset memory ............................................... 23
MP3 ....................................................................... 35
MP3 CD
Searching for a track ........................................ 39
Searching for music ......................................... 39
Selecting a track .............................................. 37
Muting (audio source) .................................................. 8
Muting (telephone) ............................................. 58 73
Muting the microphone (telephone) ....................... 58 73
Navigation
Activating alternative routes ............................. 143
Adding destinations
(personal destination memory).......................... 147
Area search .................................................. 151
Avoiding a stretch of road ............................... 155
Calling a destination from the personal
destination memory ........................................ 148
Calling the destination ..................................... 146
Deleting a destination ........................... 145 148
Destination input using geographical coordinates . 158
Destination input using the map ........................ 158
Displaying the location of a destination
(list of previous destinations) ............................ 145
Displaying the location of a destination
(personal destination memory).......................... 147
Editing an address (list of previous destinations) .. 145
Editing an address (personal destination memory) 147
Editing the name of a personal destination .......... 148
Entering an address ....................................... 141
Entering an address from the list of
previous destinations ...................................... 145
Entering an address from the personal
destination memory ........................................ 147
Entering the country ....................................... 142
Entering the junction ....................................... 143
Entering the street and number ........................ 142
Entering the town/postal code.......................... 142
Entering/editing a telephone number for a
destination in the personal destination memory ... 148
General operation .......................................... 140
List of previous destinations ............................. 144
Personal destination memory ........................... 146
Points of interest ........................................... 151
Reloading data .............................................. 164
Safety notice .................................................141
Sending a destination from the personal
destination memory ........................................149
Setting a detour .............................................153
Setting the volume of the announcement ............141
Starting route guidance ...................................143
Starting route guidance with route
alternatives activated ......................................143
Stopovers .....................................................155
Stopping route guidance .................................143
Storing a destination (off-road navigation) ...........158
Storing a destination from the list of previous
destinations in the personal destination memory ..145
Storing a position (off-road navigation) ...............159
Network selection .....................................................91
Off-road navigation ..................................................159
Activating/deactivating ....................................160
Landmark navigation .......................................160
Recording a trip section (trace) .........................161
Safety notice .................................................160
Storing a destination .......................................158
Storing a position ...........................................159
Tracing a route ..............................................163
Opening the CD/DVD changer menu .............................11
Opening the changer menu .........................................11
Opening the rear blind automatically ...........................137
Operating ..................................................................9
Operating lever for the on-board computer ..................175
Options for route guidance .......................................153
Orienting the map to the north ...................................170
ParkAssist .............................................................114
Closing the display .........................................115
Switching the display on/off .............................115
Parking with the rear view camera display ...................117
Performing voice adaptation for the
voice control system ...............................................177
Personal destinations ...............................................146
Personal Identification Number (PIN) .............................73
Personal trip data....................................................113
Phonebook....................................................... 60 76
Calling an entry ........................................ 61 76
Creating and storing an entry .............................76
Deleting an entry ..............................................77
Deleting the contents of the SIM card ..................77
Deleting the phonebook ........................... 71 100
Editing an entry ................................................77
Sending a vCard ...................................... 61 77
Setting automatic transfer ......................... 70 99
Setting sorting ......................................... 70 99
Setting the storage location ....................... 70 98
Settings..........................................................70
Transferring .......................................... 71 100
Transferring the phonebook entries manually.........71
Picture format ..........................................................32
Picture settings for TV mode .......................................31
PIN .........................................................................73
Pin Unblocking Key (PUK) ............................................73
Playlists (iPod) ..........................................................41
Points of interest .....................................................151
Searching by category ....................................151
Searching by name .........................................152
Searching by telephone number ........................152
Searching in the map view ...............................152
Previous calls ................................................... 61 78
Previous destinations (navigation) ...............................144
PTY filter .................................................................26
PUK ........................................................................73
Radio ......................................................................22
PTY filter.........................................................26
RDS ...............................................................25
Setting the mode .............................................22
Storing stations on station buttons ......................23
Traffic programme ...........................................24
Tuning to stations .............................................22
RDS ........................................................................25
Switching radio text on/off .................................25
Switching RDS on/off ........................................25
Switching regionalisation on or off .......................25
Rear view camera ...................................................116
Parking with the display ...................................117
Picture settings ..............................................117
Switching on grid lines ....................................117
Index
197
Switching the display on/off ............................ 116
Received calls ................................................... 62 79
Recording (Sport display)
Continuing .................................................... 128
Deleting ....................................................... 130
Evaluating .................................................... 129
Renaming ..................................................... 130
Starting ....................................................... 127
Stopping ...................................................... 128
Recording a trip section (trace) ................................. 161
Recording laps (Sport display) .................................. 127
Redialling ..................................................60 75 95
Reference lap (Sport display)
Defining ....................................................... 131
Deleting ....................................................... 131
Renaming ..................................................... 131
Resetting ..................................................... 131
Regional code .......................................................... 35
Rejecting a call ................................................. 59 75
Reloading data ....................................................... 164
Reloading navigation data ........................................ 164
Renaming
Contact person (logbook) ................................ 122
Driver (logbook) ............................................ 122
Recording (Sport display) ................................ 130
Reference lap (Sport display) ........................... 131
Trip destination (logbook) ................................ 122
Trip purpose (logbook) ................................... 122
Repeating (track) ...................................................... 39
Repeating a track
AUX BT .......................................................... 49
CD/DVD ......................................................... 39
iPod .............................................................. 42
USB .............................................................. 46
Resetting personal settings ........................................ 20
Resetting settings..................................................... 20
Resetting trip data .................................................. 114
Restoring factory settings .......................................... 20
Restoring vehicle handover settings ............................. 20
Right rotary knob ...................................................... 11
Ringtone type ................................................... 66 91
Ringtone volume................................................ 66 91
Route
Displaying sections ........................................ 111
Route alternatives ................................................... 143
, ,
198
Index
Safety notice (navigation) ......................................... 141
Scanning (radio mode) ............................................... 23
Searching for a track
iPod .............................................................. 40
MP3 CD ......................................................... 39
USB .............................................................. 44
Searching for music
MP3 CD ......................................................... 39
USB .............................................................. 44
Sections of the route ............................................... 111
Selecting a chapter (video DVD mode) .......................... 38
Selecting a track
CD/DVD ......................................................... 37
MP3 CD ......................................................... 37
Selecting display of the arrival time in the map view ...... 170
Sending a destination from the personal
destination memory ................................................ 149
Sending own number ................................................. 95
Setting
3D map display ............................................. 166
Adaptation of the central vents ......................... 138
Air flow strength ............................................ 138
AudioPilot ....................................................... 16
Automatic air circulation.................................. 138
Automatic call answering .................................. 95
Balance ......................................................... 15
Bass ............................................................. 15
Brightness (rear view camera) .......................... 117
Brightness (TV) ................................................ 31
Brightness of the display ................................... 19
Call forwarding ................................................ 93
Cancelling a detour ........................................ 154
Colour (rear view camera) ............................... 118
Colour (TV) ..................................................... 32
Colours for the display...................................... 18
Comfort options ............................................ 137
Contents of the personal display....................... 113
Contrast (rear view camera) ............................ 118
Contrast (TV) .................................................. 32
Day design ..................................................... 18
Daytime running lights .................................... 135
Display .......................................................... 18
Display layout in the map view.......................... 168
Displaying the total route in the map display ....... 167
DVD audio format ............................................ 38
DVD audio groups ............................................ 38
Dynamic route planning ................................... 154
Entry aid ...................................................... 137
Fade-out time ................................................ 135
Fade-out time for the interior lights .................... 136
Fader............................................................. 15
Fast/short route ............................................ 154
Folding in of the exterior mirrors ....................... 137
Headlight alignment (driving on left/right) ........... 136
Keyboard layout .............................................. 15
Language ....................................................... 19
Language for voice control .............................. 175
Layout of the input menu ................................... 15
Layout of the letters on the keyboard
in the input menu ............................................. 15
Light options ................................................. 135
Loudness ................................................16 17
Lowering of the exterior mirror ......................... 137
Making a detour around a section ..................... 153
Mode (AUX BT) ................................................ 48
Mode (AUX) ..................................................... 47
Mode (CD/DVD) ............................................... 37
Mode (iPod) .................................................... 40
Mode (radio) ................................................... 22
Mode (TV) ....................................................... 27
Mode (USB) .................................................... 44
Night design ................................................... 18
Opening of the rear blind ................................. 137
Options for air conditioning .............................. 137
Orientation light ............................................. 136
Preset memory ............................................... 23
Rain sensor .................................................. 136
Rear wiper .................................................... 137
Reception country (TV) ...................................... 31
Ringtone type .................................................. 91
Ringtone volume .............................................. 91
SDV (speed-dependent volume) .......................... 16
Sorting criteria for the station list........................ 26
Sorting of the station list (TV) ............................. 31
Sound conditioner ............................................ 16
Station (radio) ................................................. 22
Station (TV) ..................................................... 27
Surround .................................................16 17
Switching the touchscreen on/off ....................... 19
Treble ............................................................ 15
,
Units ...................................................... 18 19
Use of the upper ventilation zone ...................... 138
Volume............................................................. 8
Volume of the navigation announcement ............. 141
Volume of the traffic programme announcements .. 25
Wiper options ................................................ 136
Setting a block for a route section ............................. 153
Setting a detour ...................................................... 153
Setting a fast/quick route ......................................... 154
Setting a perspective map ........................................ 169
Setting a short route ............................................... 154
Setting adaptation of the central vents ........................ 138
Setting AM mode ...................................................... 22
Setting AudioPilot ...................................................... 16
Setting automatic air circulation................................. 138
Setting automatic transfer of the phonebook.................. 99
Setting autozoom.................................................... 167
Setting colours for the display ..................................... 18
Setting comfort options ........................................... 137
Setting consumption .................................................. 20
Setting dynamic route planning (TMC) ......................... 154
Setting filtering of background noise ............................ 16
Setting FM mode ...................................................... 22
Setting folding in of the exterior mirrors ...................... 137
Setting light options ................................................ 135
Setting picture parameters (rear view camera)
Brightness .................................................... 117
Colour .......................................................... 118
Contrast ....................................................... 118
Setting picture parameters (TV)
Brightness ...................................................... 31
Colour ............................................................ 32
Contrast ......................................................... 32
Format ........................................................... 32
Setting ringtones ...................................................... 91
Setting SDV (speed-dependent volume) ......................... 16
Setting sound conditioner ........................................... 16
Setting surround ............................................... 16 17
Setting the air conditioning ....................................... 137
Setting the air flow strength ...................................... 138
Setting the audio source .............................................. 8
Setting the balance ................................................... 15
Setting the bass ....................................................... 15
Setting the brightness (TV mode) ................................. 31
Setting the colours for the map ................................. 170
Setting the day design ............................................... 18
Setting the daytime running lights ..............................135
Setting the display layout ..........................................168
Setting the display of 3D points of interest ..................169
Setting the display of additional data (Sport display) ......132
Setting the display of speed limits ..............................169
Setting the fade-out time ..........................................135
Setting the fade-out time for the interior lights ..............136
Setting the fader .......................................................15
Setting the headlight alignment (driving on left/right) .....136
Setting the junction zoom in the map view ...................169
Setting the keyboard layout ........................................15
Setting the language ..................................................19
Setting the layout of the letters on the keyboard in
the input menu..........................................................15
Setting the loudness .......................................... 16 17
Setting the mode (CD/DVD) ........................................37
Setting the night design .............................................18
Setting the orientation light .......................................136
Setting the preset memory in radio mode ......................23
Setting the reception country for TV mode .....................31
Setting the standard trip for the logbook .....................119
Setting the temperature display ...................................20
Setting the treble ......................................................15
Setting the units................................................ 18 19
Setting the volume ......................................................8
Setting the volume for a voice control
system announcement .............................................175
Setting transfer of your own number .............................95
Setting TV mode .......................................................22
Setting use of the upper ventilation zone .....................138
Setting wiper options ...............................................136
Settings
Bluetooth® (external Bluetooth® audio source) .....49
Bluetooth® (logbook) ......................................124
Bluetooth® (navigation) ...................................149
Bluetooth® (Sport display) ...............................133
Bluetooth® (telephone) ............................. 67 95
Calls ..............................................................93
Display ...........................................................18
Extended memory ..........................................135
Messages and data ........................................100
Phonebook.............................................. 70 98
Picture settings (rear view camera) ...................117
Picture settings (TV) .........................................31
Radio mode ....................................................25
SIM card .........................................................92
Telephone (PCM telephone) ................................91
Telephone settings ...........................................66
Shuffle function
AUX BT ...........................................................49
CD/DVD .........................................................39
iPod ...............................................................42
USB ...............................................................46
SIM card
Deleting the contents ........................................77
Inserting the card .............................................72
SIM settings .............................................................92
SIM slot ...................................................................10
Skipping a track (CD/DVD, USB or iPod mode) ...............10
Skipping tracks
AUX BT ...........................................................49
CD/DVD .........................................................39
iPod ...............................................................42
USB ...............................................................46
Slot for the SIM card ..................................................10
SMS .......................................................................83
Accepting vCards .............................................88
Calling telephone numbers .................................89
Creating a template ..........................................90
Creating and sending a new text message ............85
Creating using a text template ............................86
Creating with attached reply ...............................85
Creating with new text ............................... 84 86
Deleting ..........................................................87
Deleting vCards ...............................................89
Discarding vCards ............................................89
Displaying the complete text ..............................90
Editing and sending the text of the last message ...86
Editing vCards .................................................88
Forwarding ......................................................87
Numbers in text messages ................................89
Reading ..........................................................84
Reading a vCard...............................................87
Replying .........................................................84
Replying using a text template ............................85
Replying with Yes or No .....................................85
Storing coordinates ..........................................90
Storing telephone numbers ................................89
Using coordinates for route guidance...................90
SMS service centre .................................................100
SMS settings ..........................................................100
SMS signal tone ......................................................100
Index
199
Sound settings
Setting AudioPilot ............................................ 16
Setting SDV .................................................... 16
Setting sound conditioner ................................. 16
Setting surround....................................... 16 17
Setting the balance .......................................... 15
Setting the bass .............................................. 15
Setting the fader ............................................. 15
Setting the loudness ................................. 16 17
Setting the treble............................................. 15
Sport Chrono package ............................................ 127
Sport display ......................................................... 127
Continuing recording ...................................... 128
Defining the reference lap ............................... 131
Deleting a lap................................................ 130
Deleting a recording....................................... 130
Deleting the reference lap ............................... 131
Ending a lap ................................................. 129
Evaluating a recording .................................... 129
Renaming a recording .................................... 130
Renaming the reference lap ............................. 131
Resetting the defined reference lap................... 131
Setting the display of additional data ................. 132
Starting a new lap.......................................... 129
Starting recording ......................................... 127
Stopping recording ........................................ 128
Storing a lap as the reference lap ..................... 131
Timing the interval ......................................... 129
Transferring data ........................................... 132
Stalk for direction indicators, high beam and
headlight flasher ..................................................... 175
Starting a new lap (Sport display) .............................. 129
Starting a search (radio or TV mode) ............................ 10
Starting route guidance ........................................... 143
Starting/stopping scanning
AUX BT .......................................................... 49
CD/DVD ......................................................... 39
USB .............................................................. 46
Station buttons ..........................................22 23 27
Station list ........................................................ 22 24
PTY filter (programme type) ............................... 26
Setting sorting (TV) .......................................... 31
Setting sorting criteria ...................................... 26
Station search ......................................................... 22
Status of the call diversion ......................................... 94
, ,
200
Index
Stopovers ............................................................. 155
Deleting ....................................................... 157
Entering ....................................................... 155
Reorganising................................................. 157
Storing ........................................................ 157
Via destinations ............................................. 156
Stopping route guidance .......................................... 143
Storing
Coordinates (vehicle position) ............................ 90
Destination (off-road navigation)........................ 158
Destination from the list of previous destinations
in the personal destination memory................... 145
Key assignment in the logbook......................... 123
Lap as reference lap ...................................... 131
Phonebook entry ............................................. 76
Position ....................................................... 159
Refuelling stop (logbook) ................................. 122
Station (radio) ................................................. 23
Station (TV) ..................................................... 28
Telephone number ....................................78 79
Telephone numbers from a text message ............ 89
Storing a destination ......................................145 158
Storing a lap as the reference lap (Sport display).......... 131
Storing a position (off-road navigation) ........................ 159
Storing stations .................................................23 28
Choosing a station in the station list and storing it . 24
Storing stations manually .................................. 24
Storing stations manually (TV) ............................ 28
Storing via an automatic station search (radio) ...... 24
Storing via an automatic station search (TV) ......... 28
Storing TV stations ................................................... 28
Supplementary services ............................................. 83
Supported audio formats ........................................... 35
Switching
Switching to an external audio source ................. 47
Switching to an external Bluetooth® audio source . 48
Switching to radio mode ................................... 22
Switching between day/night .............................18 170
Switching between main menus ................................... 12
Switching device on/off ............................................... 7
Switching grid lines for the rear view camera on .......... 117
Switching on/off ......................................................... 7
RDS .............................................................. 25
Switching the touchscreen on/off ................................ 19
Telephone
Accepting a call ........................................58 74
Automatic call answering ................................... 95
Bluetooth® ..................................................... 54
Call waiting ..............................................64 81
Call waiting (swapping) and conference .........65 82
Calling a phonebook entry ..........................61 76
Changing the PIN ............................................. 92
Conducting calls with the hands-free unit .......58 73
Dialling a number ......................................60 75
Direct dialling ...........................................60 75
Displaying the IMEI ........................................... 92
Displaying the phonebook...........................60 76
Ending a call ............................................59 74
Entering the PIN .............................................. 73
Entering the PUK ............................................. 73
Establishing an additional call ......................63 81
Holding a call ...........................................60 76
Inserting the SIM card ....................................... 72
List of previous calls .................................61 78
List of received calls .................................62 79
Making an emergency call ................................. 83
Muting the microphone ..............................58 73
Number of the SMS service centre ................... 100
Redialling ................................................60 75
Rejecting a call .........................................59 75
Selecting a network.......................................... 91
Setting call forwarding ...................................... 93
Setting the call volume...................................... 66
Setting the microphone volume .......................... 66
Setting the redial function .................................. 95
Setting the ringtone type ............................66 91
Setting the ringtone volume ........................66 91
Setting transfer of your own number ................... 95
Settings (PCM telephone) .................................. 91
SMS settings ................................................ 100
Supplementary services .................................... 83
Switching call waiting on/off .............................. 94
Switching on/off .............................................. 91
Switching the PIN prompt on and off ................... 93
Switching the SMS signal tone on/off ................ 100
Text messages (SMS) ....................................... 83
Touch tone dialling (DTMF tones) .................63 80
Using a stored PIN ........................................... 93
,
Telephone conference ....................................... 65 82
Text message (SMS) ................................................. 83
Accepting vCards ............................................. 88
Calling telephone numbers ................................. 89
Creating a template .......................................... 90
Creating and sending a new text message ............ 85
Creating using a text template ............................ 86
Creating with attached reply............................... 85
Creating with new text .............................. 84 86
Deleting ......................................................... 87
Deleting vCards ............................................... 89
Discarding vCards ............................................ 89
Displaying the complete text .............................. 90
Editing and sending the text of the last message ... 86
Editing vCards ................................................. 88
Forwarding ..................................................... 87
Numbers in text messages ................................ 89
Reading .......................................................... 84
Reading a vCard .............................................. 87
Replying ......................................................... 84
Replying using a text template ............................ 85
Replying with Yes or No .................................... 85
Storing coordinates .......................................... 90
Storing telephone numbers ................................ 89
Using coordinates for route guidance .................. 90
Timing the interval (Sport display) .............................. 129
TMC messages ...................................................... 109
Touch tone dialling ............................................ 63 80
TP (traffic programme) ............................................... 24
Tracing ....................................................... 161 163
Tracing a route ....................................................... 163
Track list
iPod............................................................... 42
USB ............................................................... 46
Traffic Message Channel .......................................... 109
Traffic messages (TP) ................................................ 24
Traffic programme
Activating traffic programme announcements ........ 24
Setting the volume of the announcements ............ 25
Transferring data (logbook) ....................................... 124
Transferring data (Sport display) ................................ 132
Trip data ............................................................... 113
Tuner ...................................................................... 22
Tuning to stations
Tuning to stations by entering the
frequency manually...........................................23
Tuning to stations using the station buttons ..........22
Tuning to stations using the station buttons (TV) ....27
Tuning to stations using the station list.................22
Tuning to stations via a station search .................22
Tuning to stations via a station search
with scanning ..................................................23
Tuning to stations (TV)
Displaying the TV picture ...................................27
Tuning to TV stations .................................................27
TV
Calling up the main menu ...................................27
Electronic Programme Guide (EPG) .....................30
Setting picture parameters ................................31
Setting sorting of the station list .........................31
Setting the reception country .............................31
Setting TV mode ..............................................27
Storing TV stations ...........................................28
Tuning to TV stations ........................................27
Video text .......................................................29
Twin SIM cards .........................................................72
Undoing a menu selection ...........................................11
USB ........................................................................43
Fast forward/reverse ........................................46
Repeating a track .............................................46
Searching for a track ........................................44
Searching for music .........................................44
Shuffle function ................................................46
Skipping to the next track ..................................46
Starting/stopping scanning ................................46
Switching to USB mode .....................................44
Track list ........................................................46
USB interface of the PCM ...........................................43
Using geographical coordinates from an SMS for
route guidance .........................................................90
vCard
Accepting .......................................................88
Discarding (deleting) .........................................89
Editing............................................................88
Sending .................................................. 61 77
Vehicle functions
Adaptation of the central vents .........................138
Air flow strength.............................................138
Automatic air circulation ..................................138
Comfort options .............................................137
Daytime running lights .....................................135
Entry aid .......................................................137
Fade-out time ................................................135
Fade-out time for the interior lights ....................136
Folding in the exterior mirrors ...........................137
Headlight alignment (driving on left/right) ............136
Light options .................................................135
Lowering the exterior mirror .............................137
Opening the rear blind .....................................137
Options for air conditioning ..............................137
Orientation light .............................................136
Rain sensor ...................................................136
Rear wiper ....................................................137
Use of the upper ventilation zone ......................138
Wiper options ................................................136
Video text ................................................................29
Calling up video text .........................................29
Placing video text over the TV picture ..................30
Selecting a video text page ................................29
Voice control ..........................................................172
Activating......................................................175
Commands ...................................................173
Deactivating ..................................................175
Emergency cases...........................................185
Hands-free microphone ...................................172
Operating example for CD/DVD mode ................182
Operating example for navigation mode .............189
Operating example for radio mode ....................179
Operating example for telephone mode ..............185
Operating lists ...............................................178
Index
201
Performing voice adaptation ............................ 177
Setting quick dialogue .................................... 176
Setting repetition of commands ....................... 176
Setting the display of hints .............................. 176
Setting the language ...................................... 175
Setting the volume of the announcement ........... 175
Speech intelligibility........................................ 172
Symbols ...................................................... 175
Using the help function ................................... 177
Voice entries ................................................ 174
Voice control commands
Global commands .......................................... 173
Local commands ........................................... 173
Volume of the navigation announcement ..................... 141
WAV ....................................................................... 35
WMA ...................................................................... 35
202
Index
Technical data
Radio frequency ranges
VHF (FM): 87.5 - 108 MHz
(manual tuning in 100 KHz increments)
MW (AM): 531 - 1602 KHz
(manual tuning in 1 KHz increments)
Tuning steps used during automatic
station search
VHF (FM) 100 KHz
MW (AM) 9 kHz
Regional codes for video DVDs
Code 1:
USA, Canada and US territories
Code 2:
Europe, Greenland, South Africa,
Egypt and Middle East, Japan
Code 3:
Southeast Asia, South Korea, Hong Kong,
Indonesia, Philippines, Taiwan
Code 4:
Australia, New Zealand, Mexico,
Central America, South America
Code 5:
Russia and other countries of
former USSR, Eastern Europe
India, Africa
Code 6:
People’s Republic of China
Code 7:
Not currently assigned
Code 8:
International territory such as cruise liners
and airplanes
Affiliated countries for TV tuner country
settings
America: Central America
Belize, Costa Rica, El Salvador, Guatemala, Honduras,
Mexico, Nicaragua, Panama, other Latin American countries
Africa: Egypt
Egypt
America: North America
Bermuda, Canada, United States of America (USA), other
American countries
Africa: Morocco
Morocco
Africa: North, South East Africa
Algeria, Equatorial Guinea, Ethiopia, Eritrea, Gambia, Ghana,
Cameroon, Canary Islands, Cape Verde, Kenya, Comoros,
Liberia, Libya, Madeira, Malawi, Mauritania, Mauritius,
Mayotte, Mozambique, Nepal, Nigeria, Sahara, Zambia, São
Tomé and Príncipe, Seychelles
Africa: Southern Africa
Angola, Botswana, Lesotho, Namibia, South Africa, Tanzania,
Sierra Leone, Zimbabwe, Somalia, Sudan, Swaziland, Tunisia,
Uganda, other African countries, other Far Eastern countries,
other overseas countries
Africa: Central Africa, Madagascar
Benin, Burkina Faso, Burundi, Ivory Coast, Democratic
Republic of Congo, Djibouti, Gabon, Guinea, Guinea-Bissau,
Congo, Madagascar, Mali, Niger, Réunion, Rwanda, Senegal,
Togo, Chad, Central African Republic
America: South America
Argentina, Bolivia, Brazil, Chile, Ecuador, Guyana, Columbia,
Paraguay, Peru, Surinam, Uruguay, Venezuela
Asia: Brunei
Brunei Darussalam
Asia: China
China
Asia: Hong Kong
Hong Kong
Asia: India
India
Asia: Japan
Japan
Asia: Kuwait
Kuwait
America: Falkland Islands
Falkland Islands
Asia: Malaysia
Malaysia
America: French overseas departments
French Guyana, Guadeloupe, Martinique, New Caledonia
Asia: Central Asia, Mongolia, Bhutan
Bhutan, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Mongolia, Tajikistan,
Turkmenistan, Uzbekistan
America: Caribbean
United States Virgin Islands, Antigua and Barbuda, Aruba,
Bahamas, Barbados, British Virgin Islands, Curaçao
(Netherlands Antilles), Dominica, Dominican Republic,
Grenada, Haiti, Jamaica, Cayman Islands, Cuba, Netherlands
Antilles, Puerto Rico, St. Lucia, St. Martin (Netherlands
Antilles), St. Pierre and Miquelon, St. Vincent and the
Grenadines, Trinidad and Tobago, Turks and Caicos Islands
Asia: Myanmar
Myanmar (Burma)
Asia: Middle East, Afghanistan
Afghanistan, Gaza Strip, Iraq, Iran, Israel, Yemen, Jordan,
Lebanon, Qatar, Syria, Cyprus, other Middle and Near Eastern
countries
Technical data
203
Asia: North Korea
Democratic People’s Republic of Korea
Europe: France, Monaco
France, Monaco
Asia: Oman
Oman
Europe: Northern, Central, Southern, South Eastern
Europe
Albania, Andorra, Azores, Belgium, Bosnia and Herzegovina,
Bulgaria, Ceuta/Melilla, Denmark, Germany, Faroe Islands,
Gibraltar, Greece, Greenland, Iceland, Italy, Federal Republic
of Yugoslavia, Croatia, Luxembourg, Madeira, Malta,
Macedonia, Montenegro, Netherlands, Norway, Austria,
Portugal, Romania, Sweden, Switzerland, Slovenia, Spain, St.
Helena, Turkey, Vatican City, other Western Europe countries
Asia: Philippines
Philippines
Asia: Saudi Arabia
Saudi Arabia
Asia: Singapore
Singapore
Asia: South Asia
Bangladesh, Indonesia, Cambodia, Laos, Macau, Maldives,
Pakistan, Sri Lanka, West Indies, other Asian countries
Asia: South Korea
Republic of Korea
Asia: Taiwan
Taiwan
Asia: Thailand
Thailand
Asia: United Arab Emirates
Abu Dhabi, Bahrain, Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Asia: Vietnam
Vietnam
Europe: Eastern Europe
Armenia, Azerbaijan, Estonia, Georgia, Latvia, Lithuania,
Moldavia, rest of the former USSR, Russian Federation,
Ukraine, Hungary, Belarus, other Eastern European countries,
other Comecon countries
Europe: Poland, Slovakia, Czech Republic
Poland, Slovakia, Czech Republic
Pacific
Fiji, French Polynesia, Kiribati , Marshall Islands, Micronesia
(Federated States), Nauru, Oceania, Papua New Guinea,
Samoa, Tonga, Wallis and Futuna
–
–
"Other countries" means countries in this region not
explicitly mentioned in the list
Spelling of country names subject to correction
Australia
Australia, Australia/Oceania, Tuvalu, Vanuatu
Australia: New Zealand
New Zealand, New Zealand/Oceania, Pitcairn Island,
Solomon Islands
Europe: England, Ireland
British Indian Ocean Territory, Great Britain, Ireland
Europe: Finland
Finland
Technical data
204
Dear Customer,
In conformance with current EC guidelines, any person may operate this unit. This unit conforms to the current valid European or harmonised national standards.
It is guaranteed that the unit conforms to the currently applicable specifications regarding electromagnetic compatibility. Interference with other electrical/electronic devices caused by the unit,
or interference with this unit caused by other electrical/electronic devices, is largely prevented.
Harman/Becker Automotive Systems declares herewith that this device, PCM 3.1, conforms to the basic
requirements of applicable EC regulations and especially
to the basic requirements and other relevant regulations of the R&TTE directive 1999/5/EC.
Further information is available on our Internet site
http://www.HarmanBecker.com/Porsche.
List of countries with
GSM and Bluetooth approval (extract)
statements FCC part 15.19 and 15.21:
"This
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
Albaniadevice complies with part 15 of
Finland
Lithuania
Russia(1) This
Andorramay not cause harmful interference,
France
Luxembourg
device
and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, Serbia
including
Austria
Georgia
Macedonia
Slovakia
interference
that may cause undesired
operation."
Belgium
Germany approved by the party responsible
Malta
"Changes
or modifications not expressly
for compliance could voidSlovenia
the user's
Bosnia Herzegovina
Greece
Moldova
Spain
authority
to operate the equipment."
Bulgaria
Canada
Guernsey
Hungary
Monaco
Montenegro
Cyprus
Czech Republic
Denmark
Estonia
Isle of Man
Italy
Jersey
Latvia
Poland
Portugal
Romania
Reunion
This
ChinaClass B digital apparatus complies
Iceland with Canadian ICES-003.
Netherlands
Cet
appareil numérique de la classeIreland
B est conforme à la norme NMB-003
du Canada.
Croatia
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Turkey
United Kingdom
USA
Further information is available on our Internet site http://www.HarmanBecker.com/Porsche.
205
Bluetooth approval
QDID: B015165
Information on the laser equipment
At the date of manufacture this laser product was classified as a class 1 laser product in compliance with the national/international standards DIN EN 60825-1 : 2003-10 and DHHS Rules
21 CFR Subchapter J. The laser beam in this class 1 laser product is so weak that it does not represent a hazard when used as intended. This product is designed in such a way that the laser
beam is confined to the interior of the unit. However, this does not mean that the laser installed in the housing could not be classed as a laser product in a higher class without its housing. For
this reason, you should never open the unit housing (nullification of warranty or goodwill).
Technical data of the laser installed in the unit:
Output of laser beam: 0.68mW (DVD) / 0.85mW (CD)
Wavelength of laser beam: 665nm (DVD) / 795 nm (CD)
The laser diode is not pulsed during operation.
206

---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Create Date                     : 2009:03:18 14:40:54Z
Modify Date                     : 2012:11:22 11:58:10+01:00
Page Count                      : 206
Creation Date                   : 2009:03:18 14:40:54Z
Mod Date                        : 2012:11:22 11:58:10+01:00
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 (Windows)
Author                          : DGraf
Metadata Date                   : 2012:11:22 11:58:10+01:00
Creator                         : DGraf
Title                           : PCM3.1.book
Has XFA                         : No

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools